2017 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
2017 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
April 2016
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Expedition
Litho in U.S.A.
HL1J 19A321 AA
ford.ca
owner.ford.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2016
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 03/2016 20160329120403
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.......................................12
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................15
Child Safety
General Information.......................................16
Installing Child Restraints.............................17
Booster Seats..................................................24
Child Restraint Positioning.........................26
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation..................................29
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................30
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................32
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................33
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................33
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................35
Seatbelt Extension........................................35
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation..................................36
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................37
Side Airbags.....................................................38
Safety Canopy™............................................39
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40
Airbag Disposal................................................41
Keys and Remote Controls
Principle of Operation..................................42
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................42
Remote Control..............................................43
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................46
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................47
Creating a MyKey...........................................48
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49
Checking MyKey System Status..............50
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................51
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................52
Manual Liftgate...............................................54
Power Liftgate.................................................56
Keyless Entry...................................................58
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................61
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................62
Power Running Boards
Using Power Running Boards....................63
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Column Shift/Manual Adjustable
Steering Column........................................65
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Floor Shift/Manual Adjustable
Steering Column........................................65
1
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................66
Audio Control...................................................67
Voice Control...................................................68
Cruise Control.................................................69
Information Display Control......................69
Heated Steering Wheel...............................69
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................70
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers..........................................71
Autowipers.........................................................71
Windshield Washers......................................72
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72
Lighting
General Information......................................73
Lighting Control...............................................73
Autolamps........................................................74
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75
Daytime Running Lamps.............................75
Front Fog Lamps............................................76
Direction Indicators........................................76
Interior Lamps..................................................77
Ambient Lighting............................................78
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................79
Exterior Mirrors...............................................80
Interior Mirror....................................................81
Childminder Mirror..........................................81
Rear Quarter Windows................................82
Sun Visors.........................................................82
Moonroof...........................................................82
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................84
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................87
Audible Warnings and Indicators............90
Information Displays
General Information.......................................91
Information Messages................................102
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control..............................112
Manual Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Manual Temperature
Control (EMTC)..........................................113
Automatic Climate Control........................115
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................116
Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........119
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................120
Remote Start.................................................120
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position...................121
Head Restraints..............................................121
Manual Seats.................................................123
Power Seats....................................................124
Memory Function..........................................125
Rear Seats.......................................................126
Heated Seats..................................................133
Climate Controlled Seats..........................134
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............136
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................141
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................143
Overhead Console........................................143
2
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................144
Ignition Switch...............................................144
Keyless Starting............................................144
Steering Wheel Lock...................................145
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................145
Engine Block Heater....................................148
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions......................................150
Fuel Quality......................................................151
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................151
Running Out of Fuel......................................151
Refueling..........................................................152
Fuel Consumption........................................155
Emission Control System..........................156
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...........................159
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................165
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential..............................172
Brakes
General Information.....................................173
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................173
Parking Brake..................................................174
Hill Start Assist..............................................174
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................176
Using Traction Control................................176
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................177
Using Stability Control................................178
Terrain Response
Using Hill Descent Control.......................180
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................182
Rear Parking Aid............................................182
Front Parking Aid..........................................183
Rear View Camera.......................................184
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................187
Using Cruise Control....................................187
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System..............189
Steering............................................................193
Drive Control..................................................194
Self-Leveling Suspension.........................194
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................196
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................197
Load Limit.......................................................198
Towing
Towing a Trailer............................................203
Trailer Sway Control...................................204
Recommended Towing Weights...........204
Essential Towing Checks..........................207
Towing Points.................................................214
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......215
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................218
Reduced Engine Performance.................218
3
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Economical Driving......................................218
Driving Through Water................................219
Floor Mats........................................................219
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................221
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................222
Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............226
In California (U.S. Only).............................227
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................228
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................229
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................229
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................230
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................231
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................231
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart...........................233
Changing a Fuse............................................241
Maintenance
General Information...................................243
Opening and Closing the Hood..............243
Under Hood Overview...............................244
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................245
Engine Oil Check..........................................245
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................246
Engine Coolant Check................................247
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................251
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................251
Brake Fluid Check........................................252
Washer Fluid Check....................................252
Fuel Filter........................................................253
Changing the 12V Battery.........................253
Checking the Wiper Blades......................255
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................255
Adjusting the Headlamps........................256
Removing a Headlamp..............................257
Changing a Bulb...........................................257
Bulb Specification Chart..........................260
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................262
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................264
Cleaning Products.......................................264
Cleaning the Exterior..................................265
Waxing.............................................................266
Cleaning the Engine...................................266
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................267
Cleaning the Interior...................................267
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................268
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................268
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............270
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................270
Vehicle Storage.............................................270
Wheels and Tires
General Information....................................273
Tire Care..........................................................276
Using Snow Chains......................................291
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........292
Changing a Road Wheel............................297
Technical Specifications...........................302
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications................................304
Motorcraft Parts..........................................304
4
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Vehicle Identification Number...............306
Vehicle Certification Label.......................307
Transmission Code Designation............307
Capacities and Specifications...............308
Audio System
General Information....................................313
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................314
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD...................................................................316
Digital Radio...................................................318
Satellite Radio..............................................320
USB Port..........................................................323
Media Hub......................................................323
SYNC™
General Information...................................324
Using Voice Recognition...........................326
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............328
SYNC™ Applications and Services......340
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................348
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................356
SYNC™ 3
General Information...................................365
Home Screen.................................................378
Using Voice Recognition...........................379
Entertainment..............................................386
Climate............................................................396
Phone..............................................................399
Navigation.....................................................404
Apps...................................................................412
Settings............................................................414
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................426
Accessories
Accessories....................................................439
Ford Protect
Ford Protect....................................................441
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......443
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........446
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................449
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........452
Appendices
End User License Agreement.................462
5
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
8
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (e.g., your contact information), to
offer you products or services that may
interest you. Data may be provided to our
service providers such as part suppliers
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data.
We retain this data only as long as
necessary to perform these functions or to
comply with law. We may provide
information where required in response to
official requests to law enforcement or
other government authorities or third
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if
equipped), if you choose to use connected
apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle
Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you
consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by
Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
9
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 324).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
10
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 324).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’ s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 324).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
11
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us and help to manage your
account.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to the Account Manager, go to
www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in
front of an active passenger airbag.
12
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING
Use of wireless plug-in devices in the
OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) may
allow unauthorized third parties to
gain access to vehicle systems and data
which could impair the function of various
vehicle systems, including safety-related
systems. The DLC should only be used by
a repair facility that operates in accordance
with Ford’ s service and repair instructions.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
13
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
15
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
WARNINGS
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
16
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
17
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the seat is installed all the way
back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
18
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E206121
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats. This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
19
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seatback and
seat cushion meet (called the seat bight)
and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child seat,
however the seatbelt can still be used to
attach the child seat if the lower anchors
are not used. For forward-facing child
seats, the top tether strap must also be
attached to the proper top tether anchor,
if a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat. We recommend the use of
a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. See Using Tether Straps in this
chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
20
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E205021
E206122
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback, below the locator symbols on
the seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments.
E144054
The locator symbols are on round plastic
buttons for the center seat and on
rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to the vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child
Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
21
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are
equipped with built-in tether strap anchors
located behind the seats as described
below.
In the third row center seating position, the
tether anchor is a loop at the bottom of
the seatback.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view).
Second row bench seat
E205023
Second row bucket seats
E205024
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the seatbelt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments, do not tighten the tether
strap enough to lift the child seat off the
vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Second row outboard seating positions
E205025
Second row center seating position (if
equipped)
E205026
22
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
1. For center seating positions, route the
child safety seat tether strap over the
back of the seat. For outboard seating
positions, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the
head restraint posts. If the top of the
safety seat hits the head restraint,
recline the seat back slightly to obtain
proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
E205027
3. Grasp the tether strap and position it
to the seat frame.
E205028
4. Rotate the tether strap, and clip the
tether strap to the anchor on the seat
frame.
E205029
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Third row center seating position
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
E205030
2. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the
seating position. You may need to pull
back the top of the hinged panel along
the bottom of the seatback to access
the tether anchor.
23
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E205032
3. Clip the tether strap through the anchor
loop as shown. If the tether strap is
clipped incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly in
the event of a crash.
E205033
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. If the safety seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly
increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
24
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
25
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
26
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
121).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
27
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E205034
The locks are located on the rear edge of
each rear door and must be set separately
for each door.
Move the lock control up to engage the
lock. Move it down to disengage the lock.
28
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
29
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. In side crashes and
rollovers, the pretensioners will be
activated when the Safety Canopy is
activated.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the seatbelt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the seatbelt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the seatbelt should be
positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
30
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all seatbelts should be checked
for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly
must be replaced if the seatbelt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature or any other seatbelt function is
not operating properly when checked by
an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
31
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E205035
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
Second Row Comfort Guide
WARNING
Position the safety belt comfort
guide so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E205036
The second row outboard lap and shoulder
belt is equipped with a belt comfort guide.
This guide is attached to the quarter trim
panel. Use it to adjust the comfort of the
shoulder belt for smaller occupants in the
outboard second row seats.
E205037
32
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the belt
guide (the portion of the belt between
the latch tongue and the D-ring, not
the portion where the belt exits from
the quarter trim panel).
2. Slide the guide up or down along the
webbing so that the belt is centered on
the occupant’s shoulder.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat and a safety
belt is unbuckled.
33
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You buckle your safety belt before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you buckle your safety belt.
You do not buckle your safety belt before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7
km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse after you
switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you buckle your safety belt.
The driver safety belt is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors are closed.
• The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed,
ending in the unbuckled state. After
Step 3, the safety belt warning light
turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle then unbuckle the safety
belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off if it is
currently on.
• This will switch the feature on if it is
currently off.
34
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 264).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNINGS
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
35
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk
of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
36
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Restraint Safety System
The restraint safety system provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle restraint safety system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor, and
indicator lights.
How does the restraint safety system
work?
The restraint safety system can adapt the
deployment strategy of your vehicle’s
safety devices according to crash severity
and occupant conditions. A collection of
crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control
module. During a crash, the restraints
control module may activate the safety
belt pretensioners and/or either one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and passenger front airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
37
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 40).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a
minimum distance of at least 10 in
(25 cm) between an occupant’ s chest and
the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
38
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 40).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
39
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 40).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
40
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®.
Based on the type of crash (frontal impact,
side impact or rollover), the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
84). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
41
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
• Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle
doors.
• Unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent
access only).
• Remotely open the power liftgate (if
equipped).
• Remotely start or stop the engine and
user pre-set features (if equipped).
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft system.
• Activate the panic alarm.
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You press any button on the keyless
entry keypad within 3 ft (1 m) proximity
of an intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 43).
42
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
E210695
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. You can also use the key
blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E163047
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly.
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. You can also use the
key blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the
key blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
43
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E138619
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Carefully remove the rubber gasket
from the transmitter if it does not come
off with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery.
E138620
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
44
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction
indicators flash. We recommend you use
this method to locate your vehicle, rather
than using the panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 115).
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was
driven.
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
45
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 91).
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 91).
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, power steering column and power
adjustable foot pedals. Press the unlock
button on the remote control or unlock
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
to recall the memory positions. You can
program the remote control or intelligent
access key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 125).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 61).
46
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Note: When you switch lane departure
warning off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
47
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches
the limits. Warnings appear in the
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit.
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the
remote control into the backup
position. The location of your backup
position is in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page
145).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or remote control.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
48
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 91).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
49
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 91).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
50
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place
the transmitter into the backup position. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 145).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
is the only admin key. There always has to be
at least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in
unlimited mode.
The transmitter used to start your vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 48).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey
(page 48).
Purchase a new key or transmitter from an
authorized dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare key or transmitter. You may
need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 61).
I lost a key.
The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.The MyKey distance does not accumu-
late. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the trans-
mitter. There are no MyKeys programmed to your
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 48).
51
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
A B
E163049
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control (If Equipped)
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door unlock
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
unlock mode unlocks all doors when you
press the unlock button once. The
unlocking mode applies to the remote
control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access. You can also change
between the unlocking modes using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 91).
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
twice and the direction indicators do not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 91).
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within
3 ft (1 m) of the driver door or liftgate.
At a Door
You can use the keyless entry keypad to
lock and unlock the doors. See Keyless
Entry (page 58).
52
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
At the Liftgate
The liftgate unlocks and opens
automatically when you press the liftgate
release button.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
Your can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
• Using the manual lock on the door.
• Locking the driver door with a key.
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
remote control.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key
inside your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock and the horn
will sound twice, indicating that a key is
inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle will lock
and the alarm will arm. You can switch this
feature on or off in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 91).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle's speed
is less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
53
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You stop your vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
You can enable or disable autolock and
autounlock in the information display or
an authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 91).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on, it
shuts off when it detects a certain amount
of battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of your
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
54
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually Opening the Liftgate
E209081
1. Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
2. Pull the liftgate upward.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to unlatch the liftgate.
Opening the Liftgate Window
E209080
1. Press the release button.
2. Pull the liftgate glass upward.
55
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Closing the Liftgate
E209082
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One chime sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three chimes sound if the battery
voltage is below the minimum
operating voltage.
• One chime sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
56
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E209081
2. Press the button inside the liftgate
handle.
Note: Allow the system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
turn on obstacle detection and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
Manually interfering with the liftgate motion
may also replicate a strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
57
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
E209084
Press and release the button in the rear
cargo area.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three chimes sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
Remove the obstacle to operate the
liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E163050
58
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
You can use the keypad to lock or unlock
the doors without using a key.
For vehicles without intelligent access, you
can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own 5-digit personal entry
codes.
For vehicles with intelligent access, you do
not need to enter a 5-digit entry code.
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry
code through the information display.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
• switching the ignition on.
59
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed
keys for this procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and switch
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code will display for a few
seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Vehicles Without Intelligent Access
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you disable
the two-stage unlocking mode. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 52).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver door closed). You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
Vehicles With Intelligent Access
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
60
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Doors and Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
61
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
62
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Security
USING POWER RUNNING
BOARDS
WARNINGS
In extreme climates, excessive ice
buildup may occur, causing the
running boards not to deploy. Make
sure that the running boards have
deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running
boards will resume normal function once
the blockage is cleared.
Turn off the running boards before
jacking or placing any object under
your vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and
your vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front
and rear hinge assemblies, running board
motors, or the running board underbody
mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.
Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate
more slowly in cool temperatures.
Note: The running board mechanism may
trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and
salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this
happens, manually set the running boards
to the deployed position. Then, wash the
system, in particular the front and rear hinge
arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Automatic Power Deploy
E166682
The running boards automatically extend
down and out when you open the door.
This can help you enter and exit your
vehicle.
Automatic Power Stow
When you close the doors, the running
boards return to the stowed position after
a two-second delay.
Manual Power Deploy
You can manually operate the running
boards in the information display. See
General Information (page 91).
Set the running boards in the deployed
position to access the roof.
The running boards return to the stowed
position and enter automatic mode when
the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enabling and Disabling
You can enable and disable the power
running board feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
91).
63
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
• When disabled (OFF), the running
boards move to the stowed position
regardless of the door position.
• When enabled (AUTO), the running
boards move back to the correct
positions based on the door position.
Bounce-back
The running board will reverse direction
and move to the end of travel if it
encounters an object while moving.
64
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Power Running Boards (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
COLUMN SHIFT/MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE STEERING
COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 121).
E205804
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E183049
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
FLOOR SHIFT/MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE STEERING
COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 121).
65
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
E183047
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E183049
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 121).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
66
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again. The steering column may begin
to move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 125).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to allow extra
room to exit your vehicle. The column will
return to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
91).
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
Operate the following functions with the
control:
Type One
E205755
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Seek down or previous.C
Volume down.D
67
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205756
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Media.C
Seek down or previous.D
Volume down.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio sources.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Type One
E205757
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See SYNC™ (page 324).
68
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E205758
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See SYNC™ (page 324).
CRUISE CONTROL
E205805
See Cruise Control (page 187).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E205806
See Information Displays (page 91).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
69
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 125).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
70
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 255).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E205527
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 255).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the
amount of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It
adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is
automatically set to on and remains on until
you switch it off in the information display.
You can also switch the feature back on at
any time. See General Information (page
91).
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. Set the
control to low sensitivity, and the wipers
will turn on when the rain sensor detects
a large amount of moisture on the
windshield. Set the control to high
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting
adjusts the wiper speed according to the
moisture on the windshield only. Use the
wiper lever to wipe the windshield
on-demand.
71
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E205528
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe the windshield three
times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on and off through
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 91).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
E205529
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the
longest pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
E205529
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear
washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0
position when you release it.
72
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E173257
A
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high
beam off.
73
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may
not activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Make sure the headlamps are
switched to auto or on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
to do so may result in a crash.
E173258
A
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers activate.
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
autolamps position and you switch them
on in the information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 91).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
74
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control
to brighten/dim all interior lit
components incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control
to the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This will turn on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights will
remain on until the bottom of the
control is pressed.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display controls.
See Information Displays (page 91).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays
(page 91).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
75
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or the parking brake is released for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily
override autolamp control.
When switched off in the information
display, the daytime running lamps are off
in all lighting control switch positions.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E193834
A
Pull the lighting control toward you to
switch the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it
stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and
stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator will flash for as long as you
hold the lever in this position.
76
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
Press the switches on either side of each
map lamp to turn on the lamps. The map
lamps light when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps
come on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
E163273
Front Row Map and Dome Lamps
(If Equipped)
Press the switches on either side of the
dome lamp to turn on the lamps. The
dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps
come on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
E163274
Second Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
The map lamps are located in the
headliner above the second row seats. The
map lamps light when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps
come on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
Press the controls to activate the lamps.
E206071
77
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
Rear Cargo Lamp
The rear cargo lamps light when:
• any door is opened, and the switch is
in the middle position.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps
come on.
• any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off (and the
switch is in the middle position).
With the ignition key in the accessory or on
position, the rear cargo lamp can be turned
on or off by sliding the control.
E206072
Battery Saver
The battery saver will shut off the exterior
lamps and interior lamps, except the
hazard warning lamps if activated, 10
minutes after the ignition control has been
turned off. The system will not turn off the
parking lamps if the lighting control is in
the parking lamps on position.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
78
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
E163057
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
79
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
A
C
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163060
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in
or out.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
80
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
120).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 125).
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 189).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
CHILDMINDER MIRROR
On double bin overhead consoles, the
conversation mirror allows the driver to
view the rear seating area.
WARNING
Do not use the childminder mirror to
view rearward traffic, do not allow
rear passengers to distract you from
the driving task, and make sure the rear
view mirror has a clear view of rearward
traffic. Failure to do so could increase the
risk of a crash from an unseen vehicle,
which may result in serious injury.
E205354
Press the release area on the rear edge of
the bin door to open the childminder mirror.
The door will open to full open position.
81
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The rear view mirror may have to be
adjusted to its lower arm position to
prevent interference when the childminder
mirror is extended down.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E205283
Press and hold the VENT control to open
the rear quarter windows.
Pull and hold the VENT control to close
the rear quarter windows.
Note: Vehicles without a moonroof will only
have the VENT control.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
82
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of your vehicle
to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
83
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Type 1 and 2
E205349
Tachometer.A
Information display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar).B
Speedometer.C
Fuel gauge.D
Engine coolant temperature gauge.E
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 91).
84
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 91).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel
remains in the fuel tank. The arrow
adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling, the needle may not always
return to the exact same position. This is
normal.
Note: It may take a short time for the
needle to reach F after leaving the gas
station. This is normal and depends upon
the slope of pavement at the gas station.
Note: The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends upon
the slope of pavement at the gas station.
Note: If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different gas
pump nozzle.
Note: There is a small reserve left in the
tank when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low reminder displays when the distance
to empty reaches 50 miles (80 km) to
empty.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle remains in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
Note: Do not restart the engine until you
conclude the cause of overheating.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
The hot coolant is under pressure
and may cause serious burns.
85
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Type 3
E205350
Left Information Display.A
Speedometer.B
Right Information Display. See SYNC™ (page 324).C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 91).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 91).
86
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
Cruise Control
E71340
It illuminates when you switch
this feature on. See Using
Cruise Control (page 187).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch the
left or right direction indicator or
the hazard warning flasher on. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 247).
87
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 245).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Fasten Safety Belt
It illuminates and a chime
sounds to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate on startup,
continues to flash or remains on,
it indicates a malfunction. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. A chime sounds when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
High Beam
It illuminates when you switch
the headlamp high beam on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
Illuminates when you switch hill
descent on.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level
is low or near empty. Refuel as
soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily
when you switch the ignition on to confirm
the lamp is functional. If it does not
illuminate when you switch the ignition on,
or begins to flash at any time, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain
fault has been detected. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
88
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after you start the engine, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On Board Diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 156).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch on the
ignition before engine start to check the
bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle
is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light
stays on until you crank the engine, then
turns itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 156).
Stability Control System
E138639
Displays when the
AdvanceTrac®/Traction control
is active. If the light remains on,
have the system serviced immediately.
See Using Stability Control (page 178).
Stability Control System Off
E130458
Illuminates when you disable
AdvanceTrac®/Traction. See
Using Stability Control (page
178).
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when you activate
the tow/haul feature. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately. Damage to the
transmission could occur. See Automatic
Transmission (page 159).
4X2
E181778
Illuminates momentarily when
you engage two-wheel drive
high. If the light fails to display
or remains on when the ignition is on, have
the system serviced immediately by an
authorized dealer.
4X4 Auto
E181781
Illuminates when you engage the
four-wheel drive system. If the
light fails to display or remains
on when the ignition is on, have the system
serviced immediately by an authorized
dealer.
89
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
4X4 LOW
E181780
Illuminates when you engage
four-wheel drive low. If the light
fails to display or remains on
when the ignition is on, have the system
serviced immediately by an authorized
dealer.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Illuminates when you engage
four-wheel drive high. If the light
fails to display or remains on
when the ignition is turned on, have the
system serviced immediately by an
authorized dealer.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you leave the key in the
ignition and the driver door open.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is
not in the ignition) and the driver door is
open.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
Direction Indicator Chime
Sounds when you leave the direction
indicator on after signaling a turn and
driving the vehicle more than 1.5 miles (2.4
km).
90
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information shows in the
information display.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1 and 2)
E205351
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the
display indicate additional content
available when lit.
Main menu (type 1)
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
• Display Mode.
• Trip 1 & 2.
• Fuel Economy.
• Driver Assist.
• Settings.
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following display options.
91
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Distance to E
Digital Speedo
Oil Press
Oil Temp
Trans Temp
Trip 1 & 2
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following.
Note: Pressing OK stops/starts the timer.
Holding OK resets the odometer and timer.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
• Trip Odometer — Registers the
distance traveled of individual journeys.
• Trip Timer — Registers the time of
individual journeys.
• Average Fuel— Indicates the average
fuel consumption since the function
was last reset.
Fuel Economy
Use the arrow buttons to choose the
desired energy display.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Inst Fuel Econ
Long Term Average Fuel
Average Speed
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
92
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Normal history used or Towing history usedDTE Calculation
Engine Hours XXXXXEngine Hours
Engine Idle Hours XXXXXEngine Idle Hours
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
Trlr Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicle
Elect., Surge, NoneTrlr Brake Mode
Elect. over Hydraulic
Select time intervalAutolamp DelayLighting
Autolock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Locks
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
All Doors or DriverRemote Unlock
Set to XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset
Enable or Disable switchPower Liftgate
Courtesy WipeWipers
Hold OK to create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey*
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110 km/h),
75 MPH (120 km/h), 80 MPH (130 km/h)
or Off
Max Speed
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89 km/h), 65
mph (105 km/h) or Off
Speed Minder
93
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay Setup
Fahrenheit or CelsiusTemperature
Select Language - Hold OK to set languageLanguage
*Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set.
Main Menu (type 2)
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
• Display Mode.
• Trip/Fuel.
• Towing.
• Off Road.
• Settings.
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following display options.
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer - Press OK to change units
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission temperature)
Engine Information (Oil life, Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following trip and fuel options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed information.
94
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
• Trip 1 or Trip 2 - Shows your trip time,
fuel used, odometer and average mpg.
• Fuel Economy - Shows your
instantaneous fuel usage as a bar
graph, average mpg and distance to
empty.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage
based on time. The graph updates each
minute with the fuel economy that you
achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Also, shows your distance to empty.
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure
different towing setting choices.
Towing
No Trailer connectedTrailer Status
Active trailer name or Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabledTrailer Options
Elect. Surge, None or Elec.
Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brake Mode
Trailers CreatedChange Trailer Selected
Default Trailer
No active trailer
Press OK to change the
selected trailer
Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings
Reset Trailer Mileage
95
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
List of named trailers — Hold
OK to Delete
Delete Trailer
Naming EditorAdd Trailer
Ball Coupler Connected and Locked?Connection Checklist
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer Disconnected?
Go to start of Add Trailer ProcessTrailer Setup
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off
road information.
Off Road
Pitch, Steering Angle and Roll
Power Distribution Gauge – Displays the power distribution to the front and rear axles.
The display varies based on 4x4 configuration and driving conditions.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
96
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Sport, Normal or ComfortDriver Select
Suspension
Normal history used or Towing history usedDTE Calculation
Select time
interval
Autolamp DelayLightingVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Autolock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Locks
Autounlock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Driver’s Door or
All Doors
Remote Unlock
Remaining Life - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Enable or Disable switchPower Liftgate
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Wiper Controls
Number of Admin Keys, MyKeys
and MyKey Mileage
MyKey StatusMyKey*
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110
km/h), 75 MPH (120 km/h), 80
MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Max Speed
Speed MinderSpeed Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/
L
DistanceDisplay Setup
97
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemperature
Select Language - Hold OK to SetLanguage
*Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set.
Information Display Controls
(Type 3)
E205352
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the
display indicate additional content
available when lit.
Main menu (type 3)
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
• Display Mode.
• Trip/Fuel.
• Towing.
• Off Road.
• Settings.
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the
categories, then press the right arrow key
or OK to enter into that category. Press the
left arrow key as needed to exit back to the
main menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following display options.
Display Mode
Digital tachometer and fuel level gauge
Digital tachometer, fuel level gauge and engine coolant temperature gauge
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission temperature)
Engine Hours (Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
98
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
Oil Life
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer - Press OK to change the currently units displayed
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between
the following trip and fuel options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed information.
Trip/Fuel
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
• Fuel Economy - Shows your
instantaneous fuel usage as a bar
graph and average mpg.
• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage
based on time. The graph updates each
minute with the fuel economy that you
achieved during 30 minutes of driving.
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure
different towing setting choices.
Towing
No trailer connectedTrailer Status
Active trailer name or Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck disabledTrailer Options
Elect. Surge, None or Elec.
Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brake Mode
Trailers CreatedChange Trailer Selected
Default Trailer
No active trailer
99
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Towing
Press OK to change the
selected trailer
Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings
Reset Trailer Mileage
Delete Trailer
Naming EditorAdd TrailerTrailer Setup
Ball Coupler Connected and Locked?Connection Checklist
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer disconnected?
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off
road information.
Off Road
Off Road Status (Pitch, Roll, Wheel Angle)
Power Distribution Gauge – Displays the power distribution to the front and rear axles.
The display varies based on 4x4 configuration and driving conditions.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
100
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Sport, Normal or ComfortDriver Select
Suspension
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabledVehicleAdvanced
Settings
Select time
interval
Autolamp DelayLighting
Autolock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Locks
Autounlock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
All Doors or
Driver
Remote Unlock
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK
to reset
Oil Life
Enable or Disable switchPower Liftgate
Auto, Off or OutPwr Running
Boards
Auto or Last
Setting
Climate ControlRemote Start
Auto or OffSeats
5, 10 or 15
minutes
Duration
System - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Wipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
101
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Number of Admin Keys, MyKeys
and MyKey Mileage
MyKey StatusMyKey*
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110
km/h), 75 MPH (120 km/h), 80
MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Max Speed
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89
km/h), 65 mph (105 km/h) or Off
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & GAL, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay Setup
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemperature
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Select Language - Hold OK to SetLanguage
*Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages display or are available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you
have.
E205353
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages
automatically clear after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
102
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when you switch the traction control system off or
on. See Using Traction Control (page 176).
Traction control off/
Traction control on
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires
service. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displays when you switch AdvanceTrac off.AdvanceTrac Off
Displays whenyou switch AdvanceTrac on.AdvanceTrac On
Alarm Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when unauthorized entry into the vehicle occurs.
Switch the ignition on to stop the alarm.
Vehicle Alarm to Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
Battery and Charging System Messages
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Charging System
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off
all unneeded electrical accessories. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Turn Power Off to Save
Battery
Displays to warn of a low 12-volt battery condition. Switch off
all unneeded electrical accessories.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
103
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic
alert system sensors are blocked. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve.
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays when a fault with the blind spot information system
occurs. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system/cross traffic
alert system sensors are blocked. Driver can typically clean
the sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displays when a fault with the cross traffic alert system
occurs. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Displays when the blind spot information system with cross
traffic alert (CTA) system is operating and senses a vehicle.
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
Brake System Messages
ActionMessage
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately.
Brake Fluid Level Low
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Check Brake System
Displays when the parking brake is set, the vehicle is in ready
to drive and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the warning stays on after you release the parking brake,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Door Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
Displays when the liftgate or liftglass is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad resets.Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
104
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Engine Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine has reduced power to help
reduce high engine temperature.
Power Reduced to Lower Engine
Temp
Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the
engine is on.
Engine On
Fuel Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Displays as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Keys and Intelligent Access Messages
ActionMessage
Displays if the system does not detect the intelligent access
key in the following three scenarios: When you press the start/
stop button in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle
through the ignition states. When the engine is running and a
door is opened then closed. When the vehicle’s speed exceeds
10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time after starting.
No Key Detected
Displays during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Programmed x Keys
Total
Displays during spare key programming when the maximum
number of keys have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Programmed
Displays when you press the start/stop button without
applying the brake pedal. This is a reminder that you must
apply the brake pedal when pressing the start/stop button in
order to start the engine.
Press Brake to Start
105
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when you press the start/stop button to shut off the
engine and an Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside
the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Displays when the vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power Active
This message displays when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
Starting System Fault
Maintenance Messages
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and switch off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
Displays when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.Change Engine Oil Soon
Displays when the oil life left reaches 0%.Oil Change Required
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively
high.
Engine Coolant Overtem-
perature
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level LOW
Your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some
features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
Your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not allow
some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
106
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey™ Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey active Drive
Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and
the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to xx
MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on
and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed.
Check Speed Drive
Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder activates.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
Displays when attempting to program a spare key using two
existing MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On MyKey
Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On
MyKey Setting
MyKey park aid cannot be deactivated with a MyKey in use,
park aid is always on.
MyKey Park Aid Cannot
be Deactivated
Off Road Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when your vehicle speed requirement for off
road mode entry has not been met.
For Off Road Slow to 5MPH
Displays when off road mode becomes active.Enter Off Road Mode Enabled
Displays when off road mode becomes inactive.Exiting Off Road Mode
Displays when hill descent control mode deactivates.Hill Descent Control Off
Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 MPH (32
KM/H).
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed
107
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when hill descent control mode requires driver
shift transmission into gear.
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Displays when the hill control mode requires the driver
to resume control.
Hill Descent Driver Resume
Control
Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control FAULT
Displays when hill descent control mode disables to
cool the brake system.
Hill Descent Control OFF
System Cooling
Displays when hill descent control mode activates.Hill Descent Control Ready
Park Aid Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park
aid disables.
Check Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Displays when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the park
aid disables.
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays when the system detects a condition that requires
service. See Parking Aids (page 182).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Power Steering Messages
ActionMessage
The power steering system detects a condition that requires
service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering loss Stop safely
The power steering system detects a condition within the
power steering system that requires service immediately.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering fault Service
now
The power steering system has disabled power steering assist
due to a system error. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering assist fault
Service required
108
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key to on to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Turn Key to On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the start button
to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and START Button
Suspension System Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when there is a problem with your vehicle’s suspen-
sion system. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Driver Select Susp.
malfunction Service
required
Tire Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure.
Tire Pressure LOW
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displays when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your
spare tire is in use. See Wheels and Tires (page 273). If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Trailer Messages
ActionMessage
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake
when a trailer is not connected.
Trailer Brake Gain: XX.X No
Trailer
Displays and a chime sounds in response to faults
sensed by the TBC.
Trailer Brake Module Fault
Displays when a correct trailer connection is sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Connected
109
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when a trailer connection becomes discon-
nected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and the
system senses it during a given ignition cycle. Disregard
this status if your vehicle is not equipped with a factory
installed trailer brake controller. This message may
appear when an aftermarket TBC is used even when
the trailer is connected.
Trailer Disconnected
Displays when the trailer sway control detects trailer
sway.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Displays if there are certain faults in your vehicle wiring
and the trailer wiring or brake system.
Wiring Fault On Trailer
Displays the current gain setting from the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain XX.X
There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.
See Towing a Trailer (page 203).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault
See Manual
There is a fault with your trailer stop lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer park lamp. Check your
lamp.
Trailer Park Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing
a Trailer (page 203).
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
Transmission Messages
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to shift into park (P).Transmission not in Park
Displays when the transfer case is NOT in the neutral position.
The message indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to tow
with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Disabled
Displays when the transfer case is in the neutral position. The
message indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all
four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled
Leave Transmission In
Neutral
110
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
4WD Messages
ActionMessage
Displays when a 4X4 system fault is present.Check 4X4
Displays when the 4X4 system is making a shift.4X4 Shift In Progress
Displays when trying to select 4X4 Low.For 4X4 Low Apply Brake
Displays when you select 4X4 LOW with the vehicle
stopped.
For 4X4 Low Shift to N
Displays when you select 4X4 LOW while the vehicle
is moving.
For 4X4 Low Slow To 3 MPH
Displays when you select 2WD with the vehicle
stopped in 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4X4 Low Apply Brake
Displays when you select 2WD with the vehicle
stopped in 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4X4 Low Shift To N
Displays when you select 2WD while the vehicle is
operating in 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4X4 Low Slow To 3 MPH
May display when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW.Shift Delayed Pull Forward
111
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E205762
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
B
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the
following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and
floor.
C
Rear fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
D
Rear passenger power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.E
Rear passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature to the rear of
the passenger compartment.
F
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off.
G
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
H
112
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
I
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: ELECTRONIC
MANUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EMTC)
E205761
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off.
B
113
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
C
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
D
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and
the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
F
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
G
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the
following combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and
floor.
H
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates when the system is on.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
I
Rear passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature to the rear of
the passenger compartment.
J
REAR CTRL: When illuminated, indicates the rear climate control system is
on.
K
Rear passenger power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.L
Rear fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
M
114
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E205763
Power and Driver temperature control: Press the button to switch the system
on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the
vehicle. Adjusts the temperature setting using the control on the driver side.
A
Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled
seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 134).
B
Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 133).
C
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 120).
D
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
E
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
115
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
G
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
H
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature on the passenger
side.
I
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.J
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode
by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
K
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
L
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. If the
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
116
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
117
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press the A/C button if the indicator is
off.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
4
118
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E188689
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 133).
B
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument
panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination
of these vents.
D
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear
passenger settings through the front controls.
E
119
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 91).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
120
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
121
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outboard Head Restraints
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but you can fold them.
E205038
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the outboard head
restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
122
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
Second Row Center Seat Head
Restraint
The center rear head restraint is fixed and
non-adjustable. The head restraint
consists of a trimmed foam covering over
the upper structure of the seatback.
Third Row Head Restraints
The third row head restraints are non
adjustable, but you can fold them.
E205039
The non-adjustable head restraints consist
of:
• A trimmed energy absorbing foam and
structure (A).
• A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the strap to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull the head restraint up to place the
head restraint back to the upright
position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNINGS
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward (If Equipped)
E205040
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
WARNING
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
123
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
E205041
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E205042
The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback.
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
E181777
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Move the switch in the direction
of the arrow to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Power Recline (If Equipped)
E162731
Move the control to recline the seatback
forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to
prevent damage to the seat, the power
seats are designed to set a stopping position
just short of the end of the seat track. If the
seat encounters an object while moving
forward or backward, a new stopping
position will be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping
position:
1. After encountering the new stopping
position, press the power seat control
again to override.
124
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the seat track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about
two seconds. You will feel the seat
bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E164101
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Press the forward or rearward
side of the control for more or less support.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is on the left side of
the driver seat.
2
1
E205043
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions.
You can save a memory preset at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Switch the ignition on.
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features will move
to the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when you place the transmission in park (P)
or neutral (N) if you switch the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Doors and
Locks (page 52).
125
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or steering
column switch) (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
Equipped)
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit
and entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2
inches (5 centimeters) rearward when the
transmission is in park (P) and you remove
the key from the ignition or you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition or switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 91).
REAR SEATS
Folding Down the Second Row
40% Seat
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the
seatback to the flat back position as
the system will move forward when
you lift the release handle.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
Make sure that the head restraint is in the
down position and no objects such as
books, purses or briefcases are on the floor
in front of the second row seats before
folding them down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so
that the second row seat head restraint
clears the front seat.
126
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
E190842
1. Lower the head restraints by pulling on
the strap.
E205044
2. Locate the handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push the
seatback forward toward the front of
the vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205045
1. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you hear a
click, locking it in the upright position.
E205046
3. Lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into its original position.
Placing the Second Row Outboard
40% Seats in Cargo Mode
WARNINGS
Use caution when folding the
seatback to the flat back position as
the system will move forward when
you lift the release handle.
Always return the seat from the
kneel position prior to raising the
seatback. Failure to do so could
result in personal injury.
127
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
Place the second-row seats in a kneel
down load floor position to allow more
cargo space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the second row seat.
E205047
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to release
the seat into a kneel down load floor
position.
Returning to the Upright Position
from the Full Lowered Load Floor
Position
You cannot return the seatback to the
upright position until the seat is returned
from the kneel down position.
To return the seat to the upright position:
E205048
1. Push the seat rearward until the latch
is engaged.
2. Return the seatback to the upright
position.
Adjusting the Second Row
Outboard 40% Seat for E-Z Entry
WARNINGS
Always latch the vehicle seat to the
floor, whether the seat is occupied
or empty. If not latched, the seat may
cause injury during a sudden stop.
After using the E-Z Entry feature,
make sure there are not any objects,
cargo or the feet of a third row
passenger under the second row seat
when latching the seat to the floor. Injury
to the third row passengers feet or damage
to the seat may occur.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry
and exit to and from the third row seat.
To enter the third row seat:
E205049
128
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
1. Fold down the second row seat and
release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the seat
releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it away
from the third row.
To return the seat to a seating position:
E205050
1. Push the seat down and latch to the
floor.
2. Bring the seatback to an upright
position. The seatback should lock into
position.
Note: If the seatback will not return to the
upright position, tumble the seat again and
re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or
other objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback.
E205051
Note: If a squeak is heard from the latch
area, the latch striker pin should be wiped
clean of dust or debris.
Exiting the Third Row
E205052
1. Pull the strap located at the bottom
outboard of the seatback to release
the seat from the floor, and rotate the
seat up toward the front seat.
2. Follow the directions above to return
the seat from the E-Z entry to the
upright position.
Reclining the Second Row
Outboard 40% Seatback
WARNING
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
129
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
E205053
The release handle is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion. Lift it to
adjust the seatback to your desired
position.
Folding the Second Row Center
20% Seat (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that
the safety belts are not buckled
when moving the seat to the load floor
position.
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seatback. After returning
the seatback to its original position, pull
on the seatback to make sure that it has
fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a
sudden stop or crash.
E205054
1. Locate the release handle in the upper
left seatback. Pull the handle to release
the folding seat latch.
E205055
2. With the latch released, lower the
seatback into the load floor position.
E205056
130
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
3. To return the seat to the upright
position, lift the seatback until the latch
is fully engaged.
Adjusting the Second Row Center
20% Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a
child in a child restraint close to the front
seat occupants. Move the seat to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by
older children or adults, including children
in booster seats.
E205057
Lift the handle to move the seat forward
or backward.
Third Row Seats
Make sure that no objects are on the floor
in front of the third row seats or on the seat
cushion before lowering them. Make sure
that the head restraints are lowered and
the second row seats are not reclined.
Folding Down the Third Row Seats
to the Load Floor
WARNINGS
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that
the safety belts are not buckled
when moving the seat to the load floor
position.
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
E205058
Before folding the third row seats, fold the
head restraints down by pulling on the
strap located at the bottom of the
restraint.
E205059
Pull up on the handle located behind the
seatback while pushing the seatback
forward and down into the seat cushion.
131
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
To return the seatback to its original
position, lift the seatback until it latches
into place.
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat (If
Equipped)
Note: The power fold down seats operate
for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off. The transmission must be in park (P)
and the liftgate, or liftgate glass must be
open. Similar to the battery saver feature,
the power third row seat disables 10 minutes
after you switch the ignition off.
Note: Be sure that the head restraints are
folded down before powering the third row
seat down.
E205060
The control buttons are located on the
right-hand rear quarter trim panel
(accessible from the liftgate area).
A
B
C
E211424
Press to fold the third row left
side seatback down.
A
Press to fold both seatbacks
down.
B
Press to fold the third row right
side seatback down.
C
To return the seatback(s) to the original
position(s), press the corresponding
control again.
If the power third row seat is disabled after
10 minutes, you can enable the seat by:
• Opening any door.
• Pressing the unlock button on the key
fob.
• Pressing any keyless entry keypad
button.
• Turning the ignition key.
132
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Rear Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
133
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated,
they will turn off automatically when you
turn the engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spill on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when
the engine is running.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when
the engine is running.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
The climate controlled seat system
includes air filters. You must replace them
periodically. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 443).
134
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
Locate the filters under each front seat and
access them from the second-row footwell
area. Move the front seats all the way
forward and to the full up positions to ease
access.
E146319
To remove a filter:
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Press up on the outside rigid edge of
the filter and rotate counterclockwise
once the tabs are released, then
remove the filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end
is all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside
edge of the filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
135
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
136
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
137
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
138
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
139
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
140
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when
the ignition is switched off or the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
141
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
142
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E208344
Cup holder.A
Utility compartment, coin holder,
tissue box holder, and USB ports.
B
Power point, rear climate
controls, and 110 volt AC power
point.
C
Rear cup holders.D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
143
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
C
D
B
A
E163165
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
144
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E144447
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but your
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button twice.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
WARNING
Always check that the steering is
unlocked before attempting to move
your vehicle.
To lock the steering wheel:
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to
engage the lock.
To unlock the steering wheel:
1. Insert the key in the ignition switch.
2. Turn the key to position I.
Note: You may need to rotate the steering
wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is
a steering wheel load applied.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
145
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
146
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 91). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
147
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
148
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
149
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Fuels can cause serious injury or
death if misused or mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
150
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. We do not recommend
these fuels.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 203).
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that will not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
151
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 151).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
152
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
153
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
nozzle in position A can affect the flow
of fuel and shut off the fuel nozzle
before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
A B
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
System Warnings (If Equipped)
If the fuel filler inlet does not fully close a
warning message appears in the
information display.
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
3. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
4. Check the fuel filler inlet and the area
around it for any items or debris that
may be obstructing its movement.
154
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
5. Insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
in to the fuel tank filler pipe opening.
This action should dislodge any debris
that may be preventing the fuel filler
inlet from fully closing.
Note: If this action corrects the problem
the message may not reset immediately. If
the message remains and the service engine
soon warning lamp appears in the
information display, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that you can add to
the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty, before the first fuel
filler nozzle automatic shutoff event.
• The advertised capacity is equal to the
volumetric difference between actual
fuel fill before the first fuel filler nozzle
automatic shutoff event and the fuel
quantity when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304). It is the
usable capacity minus the empty
reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may be
able to add more fuel than the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
your engine’s break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
155
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Keeping records during
summer and winter will show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
156
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 152).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
157
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
158
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of your Automatic Transmission
Column shift transmission:
E163184
Floor shift transmission:
E209112
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Manual (M)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), you
can change gears up or down as desired
by using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.
Third (3) (Column Shifter Only)
Transmission operates in third (3) gear
only. Use third (3) gear for improved
traction on slippery roads.
159
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
• Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at
high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Tow/Haul Mode
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
• Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which will slow your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
TOW HAUL light will deactivate. Tow/haul
will also deactivate when you power down
your vehicle.
Forced Downshifts
• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
160
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and will not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
This feature gives you the ability to change
gears up or down as desired.
As long as the engine speed does not
exceed the maximum allowable limit you
can downshift. SelectShift automatically
downshifts at low engine speeds in order
to prevent engine stalls.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit, unless the accelerator pedal is at full
travel. Take notice of the shift indicator
lamp, which alerts you when to shift to
make sure you achieve the highest level of
efficiency and fuel economy.
Press the + toggle switch on the side
of the gearshift lever to activate
SelectShift.
• Press the (+) button to upshift.
• Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
Progressive Range Selection (PRS)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience (for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears will display with the
current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only
the available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift
between the available gears. Press the +
button to unlock gears to allow the
transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within
the gear range you select.
161
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position will allow you to manually
select the gear you desire. Only the current
gear will display. Use the buttons on the
gearshift lever to manually select gears.
Press the + button to upshift or the –
button to downshift. Return the
transmission to a different gearshift
position to deactivate manual control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 233).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
Column-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the
ignition key to the off position, then
remove the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
162
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot
hole and pull top half of shroud up and
forward to separate it from the lower
half of the shroud. There is a hinge at
the forward edge of the top shroud.
Roll the top half of the shroud upward
on the hinge point to clear the hazard
flasher button, then pull straight
rearward toward the driver’s seat to
remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
E163186
8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk
then move the shifter to neutral (N).
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as the halves rotate together.
Floor-shifter
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the
ignition key to the off position, then
remove the key.
E206119
2. Starting at the rear of the trim panel,
using a screwdriver (or similar tool),
carefully pry up the trim panel from the
rear attachments and disconnect it
from the console to expose the inside
of the gearshift.
E206120
3. Locate the brake shift interlock lever
on the passenger side of the shifter
assembly.
163
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press and
hold the brake shift interlock lever
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
park (P) and into neutral (N).
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as this
procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
164
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle,
see General Information in the
Wheels and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4H and 4L mode
is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
Note: If 4L mode is selected while your
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L for
proper operation.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the
information display in the reconfigurable
telltale (RTT) location under the following
conditions. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 87).
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4WD mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
4X2
E181778
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO
E181781
Continuously illuminates when
4A is selected.
4X4 HIGH
E181779
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E181780
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
4WD Switch Positions
WARNING
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles
are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with RSC®, the system will
automatically turn off the stability
enhancement feature when you shift the
4WD system into 4L (4X4 LOW). You can
manually turn the system off by pressing
the AdvanceTrac button. See Using
Traction Control (page 176). This will
disable the engine management feature,
allowing the vehicle to maintain full power
and enhanced momentum through the
obstacle. The brake traction enhancement
feature will still be enabled.
Note: The Control Trac® selector switch
should not be changed while the rear wheels
are slipping.
165
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E207350
The Control Trac® system functions in four
modes:
• 2H delivers power to the rear wheels
only. The information display will
momentarily display 2H when this
mode is selected. This mode is
appropriate for normal on-road driving
on dry pavement and provides the best
fuel economy.
• 4A provides electronic control
four-wheel drive with power delivered
to all four wheels, as required, for
increased traction. The information
display will display 4A when this mode
is selected. This mode is appropriate
for all on-road driving conditions, such
as dry road surfaces, wet pavement,
snow, or gravel.
• 4H provides electronically locked
four-wheel drive power to front and
rear wheels. The information display
will display 4H when this mode is
selected. This mode is not
recommended for use on dry
pavement. This mode is only intended
for severe winter or off-road conditions,
such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
• 4L provides electronically locked
four-wheel drive when extra power at
reduced speeds is required. The
information display will display 4L
when this mode is selected. This mode
is not recommended for use on dry
pavement. Use this mode for off-road
low-speed operation or when extra
power is required, such as climbing
steep grades, going through deep sand
or pulling a boat out of the water.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while a shift in progress message
displays will improve
engagement/disengagement performance.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
You can move the control from 2H, 4A or
4H at a stop or while driving. The
information display may display a message
indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once
the shift is complete the information
display will then display the system mode
selected.
Shifting to or from 4L
Note: 4L mode is not intended for use on
dry pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in neutral (N).
166
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
3. Move the 4WD switch to the desired
mode.
The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected.
If any of the above shift conditions are not
met, the shift will not occur and the
information display will display information
guiding the driver through the proper range
of shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is
displayed in the information display,
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
the vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(2 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity such as utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
your vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. You may
remove this air dam by removing eight bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
167
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
The transfer case supples power to all four
wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select different
4WD modes when necessary. You can find
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures in this chapter. You can
find information on transfer case
maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power your
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
• Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and
may damage drive components. 4H or
4L modes are only intended for
consistently slippery or loose surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed decreases, ease
your vehicle back onto the road. Do not
turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
168
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front
axle are submerged in water, their fluids
should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, the axle lubricant should be
replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly”.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills.
169
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
170
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident in any road
condition.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 173).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(such as ladders or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
171
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
(If Equipped)
This axle provides added traction on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.
172
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 270).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 87).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
173
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
placed in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury. Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal
downward to set the parking brake. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) (automatic transmission) or first gear
(1) (manual transmission).
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle once
you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the
system will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes release automatically
when the engine has sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down the
grade. This is an advantage when pulling
away on a slope, for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
The system will activate automatically on
any slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 91). The
system will remain on or off depending on
how it was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
174
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Brakes
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal
pressed and select an uphill gear (for
example, first (1) when facing uphill or
reverse (R) when facing downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display.
See General Information (page 91). The
system remembers the last setting when
you start your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
manual transmission and an information
display, you cannot turn the system on or
off. When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
175
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
E166706
The switch for the stability and traction
control system is on the instrument panel.
When you switch the system off, a
message and an illuminated icon appear
on the instrument cluster.
Use the switch again to return the traction
control system to normal operation.
Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions
regarding this feature. See Principle of
Operation (page 47).
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes:
• When a driving condition activates
either of the systems.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on:
• When you switch the traction control
system off.
• When you select an alternative stability
control mode.
176
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
177
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 176).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Stability Control and Traction
Control with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC™)
The system automatically activates when
you start your engine. You can switch off
the electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system
below 35 mph (56 km/h). When the
transmission is in reverse (R), they are
disabled. You can switch off the traction
control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 176).
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control OFF
light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedButton pressed
momentarily
178
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control with RSC Features
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledFlashes then
illuminated
solid
2
Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Disabled
1
Enabled
1
EnabledIlluminatedVehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
Disabled
4
DisabledDisabledIlluminatedButton not
pressed and the
transfer case is
switched to
4WD Low
3
1
The traction control system may still be enabled but with higher entry thresholds
compared to the full system. The electronic stability control entry thresholds are higher
compared to the full system.
2
When you press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds the indicator lamp blinks
for three seconds.
3
Your vehicle may or may not have this feature available. When you select 4WD low the
stability control light illuminates and all stability control with RSC features are disabled.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control functions are disabled.
Single wheel spin traction control is always enabled.
179
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Stability Control
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at 0 mph (0 km/h). When
stopped, the parking brake must be
applied or the vehicle must be placed in
park (P) or it may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after sustained use. The
amount of time that the feature can
remain active before cooling varies with
conditions. The system provides a warning
in the message center and a chime sounds
when the system is about to disengage for
cooling. At this time, manually apply the
brakes to maintain descent speed.
Using Hill Descent Control
Press and release the hill
descent button in the center of
the terrain management control.
The button illuminates and a chime sounds
when you switch this feature on.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent
speed, press the brake pedal until you
reach the desired speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.
Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
180
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
Hill Descent Modes
DescriptionInformation Display Message
Displays at speeds below 20 mph
(32 km/h) when you press the Hill Descent
Control and Hill Descent Control activates.
Hill Descent Control Active
Displays at speeds below 20 mph
(32 km/h) when you press the Hill Descent
Control switch and conditions are not
correct for hill descent activation.
Hill Descent Control Ready
Displays at speeds above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when you press the Hill Descent
Control switch.
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed 20MPH or
Less
Displays when you press the Hill Descent
Control switch and the vehicles is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
For Hill Descent Select Gear
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 102).
181
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 47).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
E139213
You can turn the system on or
off by pressing the parking aid
button. If your vehicle does not
have a parking aid button, the system can
be switched off through the information
display menu or from the pop-up message
that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 91).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 102).
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
182
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front parking aid sensors automatically
turn on when you shift into reverse (R) or
a forward gear.
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and the vehicle speed is below
7 mph (12 km/h).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. There is decreased
coverage area at the outer corners.
183
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system sounds an audible warning
when obstacles are near either bumper in
the following manner:
• Objects detected by the front sensors
are indicated by a high-pitched tone
from the front of the vehicle.
• Objects detected by the rear sensors
are indicated by a lower pitched tone
from the rear of the vehicle.
• The sensing system reports the
obstacle which is closest to the front
or rear of the vehicle. For example, if
an obstacle is 12 in (30 cm) from the
front of the vehicle and, at the same
time, an obstacle is only 6 in (15 cm)
from the rear of the vehicle, the lower
pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds from
the front and rear if there are objects
at both bumpers that are closer than
12 in (30 cm).
The system provides warnings when your
vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is
stationary and the detected obstacle is
less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the
bumper.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
184
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system uses two types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: The image may remain on
momentarily when you shift the
transmission out of reverse (R). If your
vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h) or
10 seconds elapse and the image remains
on, have your system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once you engage the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
fixed guidelines are on.
E163914
A
E
D
C
B
Rear bumperA
Fixed guideline: Red ZoneB
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneC
Fixed guideline: Green zoneD
CenterlineE
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Camera System Settings
Rear view camera system settings can be
accessed through the multifunctional
display. See General Information (page
91).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
185
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the video
image when an object is detected by the
reverse sensing system. The alert highlights
the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual
park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas
are still displayed.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your
surroundings when using the manual zoom
feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol on the camera screen to change
the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
186
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E208730
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On and
Off
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator changes color in the
instrument cluster.
187
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the Information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 2 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET +.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
188
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
WARNING
Never use the Blind Spot
Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Cross Traffic Alert warns the driver of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 3 mph
(5 km/h). It remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D) or neutral (N).
If shifted out of drive (D) or neutral (N),
the system enters Cross Traffic Alert mode.
Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind
Spot Information System turns back on
when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P)
or provide any additional warning when a
turn signal is on.
Cross Traffic Alert detects approaching
vehicles from up to 46 ft (14 m) away
though coverage decreases when the
sensors are blocked. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
WARNING
Never use the Cross Traffic Alert
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before backing
out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert
is not a replacement for careful driving.
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
189
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
E142441
190
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information and Cross
Traffic Alert systems illuminate an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Cross Traffic Alert sounds also sounds an
audible alarm and a message appears in
the information display indicating a vehicle
is coming from the right or left. Cross
Traffic Alert works with the reverse sensing
system which sounds its own audible
alarm. See Rear Parking Aid (page 182).
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
Never use the Blind Spot
Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage warning.
A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow these
areas to become obstructed by mud, snow
or bumper stickers, as this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a blocked sensor
warning or low visibility warning will appear
in the information display and the alert
indicator illuminates in the appropriate
mirror(s). The information display warning
can be cleared but the alert indicator
remains illuminated.
191
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
When the blockage is removed, the system
can be reset in two ways: 1) when at least
two objects are detected while driving, or
2) turn the ignition key from on to off, then
back on. If the blockage is still present after
the key cycle, the system senses again that
it is blocked after driving in traffic.
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front of the radar
or remove the obstruction.
The radar surface is dirty or obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes
to allow the radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the blocked state.
The radar surface is not dirty or obstructed
No action required. The system automatic-
ally resets to an unblocked state once the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops.
Do not use the Blind Spot Information
System or Cross Traffic Alert in these
conditions.
Heavy rainfall/snowfall interferes with the
radar signals
System Limitations
The Blind Spot Information and Cross
Traffic Alert systems do have their
limitations; situations such as severe
weather conditions or debris build-up on
the sensor area may limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Blind Spot Information System:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If you connected a trailer to your
vehicle, the Blind Spot Information System
may detect the trailer causing a false alert.
To avoid false alerts you may want to turn
the system off manually.
There may be certain instances when
either the Blind Spot Information or Cross
Traffic Alert systems illuminate the alert
indicator with no vehicle in the coverage
zone; this is known as a false alert. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 102).
192
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off
temporarily by using the information
display control; See Information
Displays (page 91). . When you switch off
the Blind Spot Information System, you
will not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
The yellow alert indicator in the outside
mirror will also flash twice. The system
switches back on whenever you switch the
ignition on.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
193
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL
Driver Select Suspension (If Equipped)
Driver select suspension delivers a unique
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering and
handling.
Driver select suspension consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock
absorbers stiffness in real time to
match the road surface and driver
inputs. This system continuously
monitors your vehicle’s motion (roll,
pitch, bounce), suspension position,
load, speed, road conditions, and
steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based
on your vehicle speed and your inputs.
The configuration remains active until
modified from the main menu on the
information display. See General
Information (page 91).
Modes:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the
composure demanded from your
vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control. The engine responds more
directly to your inputs. Sport mode is
ideal for use during more spirited
driving.
SELF-LEVELING SUSPENSION
The self-leveling suspension system is
designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Acceleration
• Towing
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle
at a constant level through a hydraulic
pump inside each rear shock. Depending
on the payload or road surface conditions
it will take approximately 2 mi (3.2 km) for
the leveling to complete.
194
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for
approximately 12 hours, the leveling system
may bleed down to a lower height. This
can be especially apparent if a trailer is left
attached to the parked vehicle for long
periods of time. You must drive your vehicle
in order to re-level the suspension.
If a self-equalizing hitch is used, your
vehicle should be driven approximately
2 mi (3.2 km) with the trailer prior to
adjusting (leveling) the hitch.
195
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE (If Equipped)
Cargo Management System
E205355
A storage compartment is located in the
floor of the rear cargo area.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
To close, lower the cover and press down
on the handle until the latch clicks.
Cargo Shelf and Divider (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not load any objects on the shelf
that may obstruct your vision or
strike occupants of the vehicle in the
case of a sudden stop or collision.
Do not place people or pets on or
under the parcel shelf.
Note: Do not put more than 30 lb (14 kg)
on shelf.
The cargo shelf and divider is located
behind the rear seat of your vehicle and
has two positions:
• A flat shelf, which pivots up and snaps
into place.
• A divider, which pivots up and snaps
vertically into place.
To move the shelf to the shelf position:
E205356
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the
channels on the side trim panels and snap
the shelf ends in the channels.
To move the shelf to the divider
position:
E205357
Pull up and pivot the shelf over the
channels on the side trim panels and snap
vertically in place.
196
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
Third Row Storage Bin (If Equipped)
E205358
A storage compartment is located in the
floor behind the second row of seats.
Lift up on the handle to open the cover.
To close, lower the cover and press down
on the handle until the latch clicks.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is 200 lb
(90 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbar
E142448
1. Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
counterclockwise (both crossbars are
adjustable).
2. Slide the crossbar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends
of the crossbar by turning them
clockwise.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
197
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
198
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
199
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
200
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
201
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
202
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label. See
Recommended Towing Weights
(page 204).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 233).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
198).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
203
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 196).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 36.5 feet² (3.39
meters²) if your vehicle is equipped
with the standard towing package,
or 60 feet² (5.57 meters²) if your
vehicle is equipped with the
optional heavy duty package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
204
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded
trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such
as a draw bar, ball, locks or
weight distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
• Aftermarket equipment
weight.
3. This equals the maximum
loaded trailer weight for this
combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load
figures into the payload for your
vehicle. Reduce the total payload
by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to
determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
Maximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
12300 lb (5579 kg)
Standard
Two-wheel drive
(except EL)
12500 lb (5669 kg)Two-wheel drive EL
12500 lb (5669 kg)Four-wheel drive
(except EL)
205
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Maximum GCWRTowing PackageVehicle Type
12800 lb (5806 kg)Four-wheel drive EL
14900 lb (6758 kg)
Optional Heavy Duty
Two-wheel drive
(except EL)
15100 lb (6849 kg)Two-wheel drive EL
15200 lb (6894 kg)Four-wheel drive
(except EL)
15300 lb (6940 kg)Four-wheel drive EL
206
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Hitches
WARNING
The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part
of the vehicle rear crash safety
structure. Do not remove the trailer
hitch. Failure to follow this warning could
compromise vehicle crash structure and
increase the risk of injury in a rear end
crash.
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
207
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
tongue weight exceeds the limit of
the towing system and could result
in vehicle structural damage, loss of vehicle
control and personal injury.
The standard integrated hitch has two
ratings depending on mode of operation:
• Weight-carrying mode requires a draw
bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of
the trailer.
• Weight-distributing mode requires an
aftermarket weight-distributing
system, which includes draw bar, hitch
ball, spring bars and snap-up brackets.
This system distributes the vertical
tongue load of the trailer between the
truck and the trailer.
Maximum Tongue WeightMaximum Trailer WeightMode
600 lb (272 kg)6000 lb (2721 kg)Weight carrying
920 lb (417 kg)9200 lb (4173 kg)Weight distributing
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual
vehicle ratings are dependent on engine,
transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles
without Automatic Leveling
Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
208
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Weight-distributing Hitch - Vehicles
with Automatic Leveling Suspension
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
Note: If you do not move the loaded vehicle
for approximately 12 hours, the leveling
system may bleed down to a lower height.
This can be especially apparent if you leave
a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for
long periods. You must drive your vehicle in
order to re-level the suspension.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Load the interior of the vehicle to a
weight similar to that which you intend
to carry when towing. This includes
things such as passenger weight and
cargo.
2. Drive the vehicle for approximately 2
miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
3. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
5. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
6. Make sure you securely attach and lock
the trailer tongue to the hitch.
7. Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
8. Drive the vehicle and trailer at 20–25
mph (32–40 km/h) for approximately
2 miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the
suspension.
9. Park your vehicle and trailer on a level
surface.
10. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
11. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is
approximately half the way down
from H2, toward H1.
12. Check that the trailer is level or
slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, remove the trailer,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 5-11.
When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
209
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and most
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not
activate hydraulic surge-style trailer
brakes. It is the responsibility of the
customer to ensure that the trailer brakes
are adjusted appropriately, functioning
normally and all electric connections are
properly made. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
E183395
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center.
210
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
The controller shows gain setting, output
bar graph, and trailer connectivity status
in the information display. They appear in
the information display as follows:
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without
trailer connected): Shows the current
gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control
lever or make gain adjustments with
no trailer connected.
• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:
Displays when you push your vehicle's
brake pedal, or upon use of the manual
control. Bar indicators illuminate in the
information display to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer
brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates
the least amount of output; six bars
indicate maximum output.
• Trailer Connected: Displays when the
system senses a correct trailer wiring
connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) during a given ignition cycle.
• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,
accompanied by a single audible time,
when the system senses a trailer
connection and then a disconnection,
either intentional or unintentional,
during a given ignition cycle. It also
displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault
occurs causing the trailer to appear
disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control
lever without a trailer connected. After
disconnecting the trailer connector,
press the brake pedal for
approximately five seconds to allow
the system to detect and update the
trailer status.
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to turn on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever illuminates both the trailer brake
lamps and your vehicle brake lamps
except the center high-mount stop
lamp, if you make the proper electrical
connection to the trailer. Pressing your
vehicle brake pedal also illuminates
both trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a
message confirming connection
appears in the information display.
211
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display
Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
A message indicating a trailer brake
module fault may display in response to
faults sensed by the trailer brake controller,
accompanied by a single tone. If this
message appears, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis
and repair. The controller may still
function, but performance may be
degraded.
A message indicating a trailer wiring fault
may display when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If this
message displays, accompanied by a
single tone, with no trailer connected, the
problem is with your vehicle wiring
between the trailer brake controller and
the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the
message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller for the first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather and
trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from when the gain was initially
set.
• Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
212
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
• Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes whether you attach a
trailer or not.
• When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down. The
controller module and display turn on
when you switch the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a
factory-installed or dealer-installed
item. Ford is not responsible for
warranty or performance of the
controller due to misuse or customer
installation.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
213
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING POINTS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery
safety practices. Improper use of recovery
hooks may cause hook failure or separation
from the vehicle and could result in serious
injury or death.
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
214
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
• Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
• Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 159).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 112).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, for example towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines prevent damage to your
transmission.
Two Wheel Drive Vehicles
You cannot tow a two wheel drive vehicle
with any wheels on the ground as vehicle
or transmission damage may occur. You
must tow your vehicle with all four wheels
off the ground, for example when using a
car-hauling trailer.
215
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Four Wheel Drive Vehicles
You can only tow a four wheel drive vehicle
with all wheels on the ground by placing
the transfer case in its neutral position and
engaging the four-wheel-down towing
feature. Perform the steps outlined in the
following section after positioning your
vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly
securing them together.
Four-wheel-down Towing
Note: Make sure you properly secure your
vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Entering Four-wheel-down Towing
1. Put the ignition in the on position, but
do not start the engine. If your vehicle
has an ignition key, turn the key to on.
If your vehicle has intelligent access,
press the engine START/STOP button
twice without pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to
2H.
4. Shift the transmission to position N.
5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch
from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five
times within seven seconds.
Note: If completed successfully, the
information display shows NEUTRAL TOW
LEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED
LEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.
This indicates that your vehicle is safe to
tow with all wheels on the ground.
Note: If you do not see the message in the
display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts into its neutral position.
This is normal.
6. Leave the transmission in position N
and turn the ignition as far as it will go
toward the off position (it will not turn
fully off when the transmission is in
position N). If your vehicle has an
ignition key, you must leave the key in
the ignition while towing. To lock and
unlock your vehicle, use the keyless
entry keypad or extra set of keys. If your
vehicle has intelligent access, press the
engine START/STOP button once
without pressing the brake pedal. You
do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle. You can lock and unlock your
vehicle as you normally do.
7. Release the brake pedal.
WARNINGS
Do not disconnect the battery during
recreational towing. Doing so will
prevent the transfer case from
shifting properly and may cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is in P
(Park).
Shifting the transfer case to its
neutral position for recreational
towing may cause the vehicle to be
able to roll even if the transmission is in P
(Park). The driver or others could be
injured. Make sure the foot brake is
depressed and the vehicle is in a secure
and safe position while the transfer case
is being shifted to its neutral position.
Failing to put the transfer case in its
neutral position will damage vehicle
components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down
towing status at any time by opening the
driver's door or turning the ignition to the
accessory or on position and verifying the
NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED message
displays in the cluster.
216
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
Exiting Four-wheel-down Towing
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return
the transfer case to its 2H position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured
to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in
the on position, but do not start the
engine. If your vehicle has an ignition
key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle
has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button twice without
pressing the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission out of N and into
any gear.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Note: If completed successfully, the
instrument cluster displays 4X2, and
NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
Note: If the indicator light and message do
not display, you must perform the procedure
again from the beginning.
Note: You may hear an audible noise as the
transfer case shifts out of its neutral
position. This is normal.
Note: If SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD
displays in the instrument cluster, transfer
case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake, and then
disconnect the vehicle from the tow
vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the
engine, and shift the transmission to
position D to make sure the transfer
case is out of position N.
7. If the transfer case does not
successfully shift out of position N, set
the parking brake until you can have
your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the SHIFT DELAY PULL
FORWARD Message
If the instrument cluster displays SHIFT
DELAY PULL FORWARD perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into position N,
and then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the
transmission to position D and let the
vehicle roll forward, up to 3 feet (1
meter). You may hear an audible noise
as the transfer case shifts out of its
neutral position. This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster
displays NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
217
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 84).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine will continue to operate
with limited power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
The air conditioning will switch off and the
engine cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 247).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back
home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
218
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
219
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
220
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
221
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
you may contact your dealer, you can call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
222
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
223
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
E213994
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
224
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
225
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
226
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
227
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
228
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
229
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
230
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
231
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
232
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from
overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you need to reset some features.
See Changing the 12V Battery (page 253).
E166589
The high-current fuses are coded as
follows:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear washer relay.Relay1
Starter relay.Relay2
Blower motor relay.Relay3
Rear wiper relay.Relay4
Fuel pump relay.Relay5
233
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electronic cooling fan.Relay6
Rear window defroster.Relay7
Heated mirror relay.
Electronic cooling fan.Relay8
Run/start relay.Relay9
Power distribution box relay.Relay10
Power running boards.40A*11
Heated seats.
Run/start relay.40A*12
Starter relay.30A*13
Electronic cooling fan.50A*14
Not used.—15
Electronic fan.50A*16
Not used.—17
Trailer brake.30A*18
Power point (console).20A*19
4x4 module HAT 2.20A*20
Trailer tow module.30A*21
Passenger power seat.30A*22
Air conditioner clutch relay.Relay23
Trailer tow park lamp relay.Relay24
Not used.—25
ALT sensor.10A**26
4x4 module HAT 1.20A**27
Trailer tow park lamp relay.25A**28
Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A**29
Air conditioner clutch relay.10A**30
Trailer tow back up lamp.15A**31
234
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Blower motor relay.40A*32
110-volt AC power point.40A*33
Auxiliary blower motor.30A*34
Powertrain control module relay.50A*35
Power liftgate.30A*36
Not used.—37
Not used.—38
Trailer tow backup lamps relay.Relay39
Electronic fan 2 relay.Relay40
Powertrain control module keep-alive
power.
10A**41
Run/start relay.5A**42
Brake on/off switch.10A**43
Fuel pump relay.20A**44
Not used (spare).10A**45
Front/rear washer pump.15A**46
Rear wiper motor.30A*47
Trailer tow module.40A*48
Not used.—49
Front wiper motor relay.30A*50
Rear window defroster and heated mirror
relay.
40A*51
Anti-lock brake system run/start feed.10A**52
Powertrain control module ISP.5A**53
Power steering.5A**54
Not used.—55
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/
start feed.
30A**56
235
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Blower motor run/start.5A**57
Not used.—58
Heated mirrors.15A**59
Not used.—60
Not used.—61
Not used.—62
Electronic fan.25A*63
Moonroof.30A*64
Not used (spare).20A*65
Auxiliary power point (rear of center
console).
20A*66
Front row climate controlled seats.40A*67
Anti-lock brake system valves.30A*68
Anti-lock brake system pump.60A*69
Third row power fold seat.30A*70
Auxiliary power point/cigar lighter.20A*71
Auxiliary power point (right rear quarter
panel).
20A*72
Rear seat climate module.20A*73
Driver power seat.30A*74
Vehicle power 1 – powertrain control
module.
25A**75
Vehicle power 2 – powertrain control
module.
20A**76
Vehicle power 4 – ignition coils.20A**77
Not used.—78
Vehicle power 3 – powertrain control
module.
15A**79
Not used.—80
236
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—81
Rain sensor.5A**82
Not used.—83
Not used.—84
Wiper motor relay.Relay85
*Cartridge fuses.
**Mini fuses.
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
right-hand side of the instrument panel.
E205347
To remove the trim panel for access to the
fuse box, pull the panel toward you and
swing it out away from the side and
remove it. To reinstall it, line up the tabs
with the grooves on the panel, then push
it shut.
237
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
The fuses are coded as follows:
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Driver window.30A1
Rear seat control.15A2
Multimedia gateway module.
Passenger window.30A3
Demand lamps.10A4
Amplifier.20A5
Rear electronic automatic temperature
control.
5A6
Power mirror.7.5A7
Driver seat memory switch.
Not used.—8
238
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
SYNC.10A9
Power lift gate.
Electric finish panel.
Display.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Passive entry/start module.10A11
Interior lighting.15A12
Puddle lamps.
Right turn and stop/turn signals.15A13
Left turn and stop/turn signals.15A14
Reverse lamp.15A15
Center high mount stop lamp.
EC mirror.
Right front low beam.10A16
Left front low beam.10A17
Brake shift interlock/start button LED/
keypad illumination.
10A18
Third row power folding seat.
Passive entry touch start.
Not used.—19
Lock/unlock relays.20A20
Not used.—21
Horn.20A22
Steering wheel control module.15A23
Cluster.
Adjustable pedals/power adjustable
column.
15A24
Datalink.
Liftgate release decklid.15A25
Liftglass release motor.
Push to start switch.5A26
Passive entry/start module.20A27
239
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Ignition switch.15A28
Key inhibit switch.
Radio.20A29
GPS.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer brake on/off.5A31
Power vent.15A32
Driver's window motor.
Power inverter.
CCD suspension module.10A33
Rear park assist.10A34
Rear camera.
BLIS.
Heated seat.
Climate module.5A35
O/D switch.
Not used.—36
4X4 module.10A37
EC mirror.10A38
Moonroof.
DVD.
AM/FM radio.
Left and right front high beams.15A39
Rear park/tail lamps.10A40
Restraints control module.7.5A41
Not used.—42
Not used.—43
Not used.—44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control.10A46
240
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fog lamps.15A47
Front passenger and rear windows circuit
breaker.
30A48
Windows and vents relay.Relay49
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
FuseTypes
E207206
241
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
242
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left hand side
of the instrument panel.
E166491
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever
under the front of the hood near the
center of your vehicle.
243
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
E190266
3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders
hold it open.
4. To close, lower the hood and make
sure that it is closed properly and fully
latched.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A
A
B D E F
C
GH
E166496
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 252).A.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 253).B.
244
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 245).C.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).D.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 252).E.
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 247).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 262).G.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 233).H.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E161560
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 243).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 244).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See
Engine Oil Dipstick (page 245).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 308).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,100 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
245
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 244).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
246
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 443).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 304).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
247
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
304).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Note: In case of emergency, you can add a
large amount of water without coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location.
Water alone, without coolant, can cause
engine damage from corrosion, overheating
or freezing. When you reach a service
location, you must have the cooling system
drained and refilled with prediluted coolant
approved to the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 304).
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
248
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
coolant temperature gauge moves toward
the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
249
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach higher a
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
250
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
If required, have an authorized dealer check
and change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 443).
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission
does not consume fluid. However, if the
transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (If Equipped)
E170444
3
1. Clean the area around the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug.
3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level
should be within 0.20 in (5mm) from
the bottom of the hole.
4. Add fluid through the filler opening. Fill
to the bottom of the opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
251
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
252
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
This vehicle may be fitted with more
than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery
does not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
253
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 313). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 79).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 313).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
• Heated rear window.
• Heated seats.
• Climate control.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Audio unit.
• Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
254
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
E205141
2
3
4
2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.
255
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
3. Press the wiper blade secondary
locking clip.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
5. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident,
contact an authorized dealer to check and
realign your headlamps.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height from the center of
your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0
millimeter circle on the lens) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)
horizontal reference line on the vertical
wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood. Cover one of the headlamps
so no light hits the wall.
E167358
4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On
the wall or screen you will observe a
light pattern with a distinct horizontal
edge toward the right. If this edge is not
at the horizontal reference line, you will
need to adjust the beam so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal
reference line.
256
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips
screwdriver to turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 243).
E167360
3. Remove the pushpin at the upper
inboard corner of the lamp.
E167361
4. Remove the three retaining bolts.
5. Slide the headlamp assembly forward
and disconnect the two attachments
at the fender.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNING
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
257
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,
clean it with rubbing alcohol before
installing it.
Headlamp Bulb
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 257).
E205568
3. Carefully remove the cover.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
LED Headlamp Bulb (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Front Direction Indicator Bulb
E205569
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 257).
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Side Marker Bulb
E183764
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
258
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
LED Direction Indicator and Side
Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Fog Lamp Bulb (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs
E187289
Reverse lamp bulb.A.
Rear lamp, brake lamp and
direction indicator bulb.
B.
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E205570
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
4. Remove the lamp assembly.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
259
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
LED Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reverse
Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp
Bulb
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
E205572
2. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
E205573
3. Remove the lamp and unclip the bulb
holder.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
LED Central High-mounted Brake
Lamp Bulb (If Equipped)
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
License Plate Lamp Bulb
E205571
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Side Direction Indicator Bulb
These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an
authorized dealer.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
260
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
5W5WPosition lamp.
57444NAFront direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
55H11Headlamp low beam.
55HB3Headlamp high beam.
LEDLEDLED Headlamps.
559140Front fog lamps.
5W5WFront side marker lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
27/6.73057Rear lamp, brake lamp and rear direction indicator.
5912Central high mounted brake lamp.
273156Reversing lamps.
5912License plate lamp.
LED lamps are not serviceable. Contact an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
3.5194Glove compartment lamp.
A6224PFVanity mirror lamp.
5W5WMap lamp.
5W5W
Interior lamp.
1
10578Rear dome lamp.
1
Second row rail lamp.
261
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 304).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 443).
E163755
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. Disconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector.
E163756
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.
E163757
3. Clean the area from around the air tube
to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp
so the clamp is no longer snug to the
air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
262
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
E163758
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element.
E163759
8. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not
to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover
and ensure that you properly align the
tabs on the edge into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube clamp
bolt snugly. Do not over tighten
air-tube clamp bolt.
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet
tube. Make sure the locking tab on
the connector is in the locked position
(connector shown from below for
clarity).
263
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (U.S.)
Motorcraft Dissolvant de goudron et éliminateur d’insectes (Canada)
ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant pour métal brillant (Canada)
ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash (U.S.)
Shampooing superfin Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser
Engine Shampoo and Degreaser
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
Motorcraft Shampooing pour moteur (Canada)
CXC-66-A (Canada)
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant pour cuir et vinyle de haute qualité (Canada)
ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
Motorcraft Nettoyant multi-usage (Canada)
CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
(U.S.)
Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoyant professionnel pour sellerie et moquette (Canada)
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
Spot and Stain Remover
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
Motorcraft Nettoie-vitres de qualité supérieure (Canada)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
CXC-100 (Canada)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (U.S.)
264
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
Nettoyant pour roues et pneus Motorcraft® (Canada)
ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’ s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
265
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’ s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
266
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
267
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 268).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
268
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
269
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
270
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
271
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
272
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 276).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload
or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
children/infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
273
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 165). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 243). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire
of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar
spare tire size (other than the spare tire
provided) or major dissimilar tire sized
between the front and rear axles could
cause the four-wheel drive system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
165).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
274
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
275
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
276
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
277
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
278
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
279
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph
(299 km/h), tire manufacturers
always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear: The treadwear
grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified
government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100.
280
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
281
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
282
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
See Load Carrying (page 196).
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
283
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
284
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size
and dissimilar spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description. Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
285
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNINGS
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years
regardless of tread wear or even
if they have not been used.
However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high-load
conditions can accelerate the
aging process and may require you
to replace tires more frequently.
286
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
You should replace your
spare tire when you replace
the road tires or after six years due
to aging even if it has not been
used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or the Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
287
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other
tire service professional should do
the mounting.
WARNINGS
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
288
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
289
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
has a tire pressure monitoring
system, then you need to update
the settings for the system
sensors. Always perform the
system reset procedure after tire
rotation. If you do not reset the
system, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when
necessary.
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life.
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram)
E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can
be corrected by rotating the tires.
290
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended
tires and wheels can cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch
post or the door edge that meets the door
latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains
offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other
conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the
vehicle's wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front tires
as this may interfere with suspension
components.
• Only certain snow cables or chains
have been approved by Ford/Lincoln
as safe for use on your vehicle with the
following tires: 265/70R17 and
275/65R18.
• You should install snow cables or
chains that have been rated as SAE
Class S.
• Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines, or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h) or
less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow
chains or cables must be mounted in
pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
291
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
292
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference.
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light will turn
on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
293
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 276).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
294
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure.
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING
To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or
the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
295
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least three
feet (one meter) away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
• A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes, then
park in a safe location where you can
easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will sound once, the system indicator
will flash and a message is shown in
the information display. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step
2. If after repeated attempts to enter
the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front
(driver's side front tire), Right front
(passenger's side front tire), Right rear
(passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
(driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that
the sensor identification code has been
learned by the module for this position. If a
double horn is heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message is shown
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
296
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position)
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 292).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
system sensors See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 292). Replace
the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of
the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
297
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle,
just forward of the rear bumper. The jack,
jack handle and lug wrench are located in
the following locations:
LocationItem
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper
Spare tire
Under the access panel located in the floor
compartment behind the rear seat
Jack tools
298
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position) or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
If you have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Disable the power running boards
before jacking, lifting, or placing any
object under the vehicle. Never place
your hand between the power running
board and the vehicle as extended power
running boards will retract when the doors
are closed. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
when using the spare tire carrier
could cause loss of the wheel and
tire and lead to personal injury: Only use
the spare tire carrier to stow the tire and
wheel combination specified on the Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Other tire and wheel
combinations could cause the carrier to
fail if it does not fit securely or is too heavy.
Do not use impact tools or power tools
operating over 200 RPM, which may cause
winch malfunction and prevent a secure
fit. Override the winch at least three times
(there will be an audible click each time)
to ensure a tight secure fit of the wheel and
tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
299
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard
flashers and set the parking brake. Then,
place the transmission in park (P) and turn
the engine off.
Removing the Jack and Tools
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation
of the bag, because it will have to be
reinstalled after changing the tire.
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the
access panel on the floor behind the
third row seat. Unlatch and remove the
panel.
E208640
2. Remove the jack and tools assembly
tray from the compartment by turning
the wing-nut counterclockwise.
Remove the bag from the jack and
tools assembly tray by loosening the
strap.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack
extension and handle from the plastic
tray.
4. Remove the hack from the tray
assembly.
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the jack handle and winch
extension from the tray and assemble
them.
2. Open the spare tire winch access plug
at the bottom of the compartment for
the jack and tools tray.
3. Insert the winch extension tool
assembly through the access hole in
the floor and engage the winch.
E208655
4. To remove the spare tire, turn the
handle counterclockwise until the tire
is lowered to the ground and the cable
is slightly slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of
the spare tire wheel and remove the
spare tire.
Jacking the Vehicle
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damaging your vehicle.
E208656
Front jacking point
300
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E208657
Rear jacking point
E175447
1. With the vehicle on level ground, block
both sides of the wheel diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the wheel being changed.
Do not jack the vehicle on a hill or
incline.
2. Obtain the spare tire and jack tools
from their storage locations.
3. Use the tip of the jack handle to
remove any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
5. Position the jack according to the jack
locator arrows found on the frame and
turn the jack handle and extension tool
assembly clockwise.
6. Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient
ground clearance when installing the
spare tire, about 1/4 inch (6
millimeters).
Installing the Spare Tire
E175447
1. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward.
3. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has
been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
E166719
1
3
5
4
6
2
301
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 302).
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear
of the vehicle, with the valve stem side
facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. If equipped, you may
have to remove the wheel center cap
prior to pushing the retainer through
the center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack
tool from the inner side of the wheel.
Pull on the cable to align the
components at the end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and winch
extension, then insert the winch
extension through the access hole
behind the third row seat and engage
the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The wrench
will become harder to turn and the
spare tire winch will rachet or slip when
the tire is raised to maximum tightness.
A clicking sound will be heard from the
winch indicating that the tire is properly
stowed.
5. Disassembly the jack tool and winch
extension and snap them back into the
tool tray.
6. Reinstall the jack bag properly around
the jack and tool assembly tray, making
sure the strap is fastened.
7. Close the access hole with the rubber
plug.
8. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and
secure it with the wing nut.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
302
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
303
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3.5L EcoboostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
10.0:1Compression ratio
0.030 in (0.75 mm) - 0.033 in (0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
E167467
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
Part NumberComponent
FA-1883Air filter element.
FL-500-SOil filter.
BXT-65-650Battery (without Intelligent
Access).
BXT-65-750Battery (with Intelligent Access).
SP-534Spark plugs.
FT-188Transmission filter.
304
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Part NumberComponent
WW-2234Windshield wiper blade.
WW-1612Rear window wiper blade.
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 443).
305
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
306
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80E
307
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
18.5 qt (17.5 L)Engine coolant (Base radiator with auxiliary
rear heat).
18.0 qt (17 L)Engine coolant (Heavy Duty trailer towing
with auxiliary rear heat).
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir
1
Brake fluid.
3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle.
4.5 pt (2.1 L)
2
Rear axle (Conventional differential).
4.25 pt (2.01 L)
2,3
Rear axle (Limited-slip differential).
13.1 qt (12.4 L)
4
Automatic transmission fluid.
1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
28.0 gal (106 L)Fuel tank.
33.5 gal (126.8 L)Fuel tank (Expedition EL).
44 oz (1.25 kg)A/C refrigerant.
308
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
40 oz (1.13 kg)A/C refrigerant (Expedition EL).
7.1 fl oz (210 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1
Reference the reservoir cap for proper fluid.
2
The rear axle is filled with synthetic rear axle lubricant, and it is considered lubricated for
life. Do not check or change the lubricant unless you suspect a leak or submerge the axle
in water. Contact an authorized dealer.
3
Add 4 fl. oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for complete refill
of Ford limited-slip differential.
4
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
309
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (Canada):
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
CPM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid (U.S. Canada and Mexico)
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® Transfer Case Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
310
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
311
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 3 or DOT
4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting
WSS-M6C65-A1 or WSS-M6C65-A2.
Please refer to the brake reservoir cap for
the proper brake fluid. Use of any fluid other
than the recommended fluid may cause
degraded brake performance and not meet
the Ford performance standards. Keep brake
fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
312
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
313
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
314
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
E205855
Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.A
Number block: In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access.
When tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttons
to enter a phone number.
B
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
C
TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.
In satellite radio mode, turn the control to tune to the next or previous channel.
D
OK and arrow buttons: Press the up and down or left and right arrow buttons
to browse menu selections. Press OK to confirm menu selections.
E
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
F
315
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Power and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
the control to adjust the volume.
G
CD slot: Insert a CD.H
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.I
SOUND: Press this button to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Balance
and Fade.
J
CLOCK: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and minutes.
K
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.L
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.M
MUTE or SIRIUS: Press this button to mute the playing audio, or if equipped,
listen to Sirius satellite radio.
N
AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch between
devices you plug into the input jack or USB port.
O
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.
Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio
functions.
P
CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
Q
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
316
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
E205856
TUNE: Turn this control to search through the radio frequency band manually.A
Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
B
MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM and
A/V Input.
C
Seek: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system
stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold the button to move
quickly to the previous strong radio station or memory preset. In CD mode, press
this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the button to move
quickly backward through the current track.
D
Power and volume: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn
the control to adjust the volume.
E
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.F
CD slot: Insert a CD.G
317
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Rear Seat Audio Controls
E182082
VOL: Adjust radio volume.A
MEDIA: Scroll through available audio system modes.B
Rear audio display: See displayed time, radio frequency, Sirius radio channel
or CD track.
C
CLOCK: Press to display the current time in 12-hour format. The time displays
for a few seconds or you can press the CLOCK button again to switch
immediately back to the last media state.
D
SEEK: Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station, Sirius radio
channel or CD track.
E
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
318
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
319
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
320
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
321
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
322
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E205592
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
MEDIA HUB
The media hub may be located on the
instrument panel or center console.
E207805
See your SYNC information.
323
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, such
as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNC
AppLink.
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
324
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
325
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 340).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
(cancel | exit)
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
help
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
(main menu | start again)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
326
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode novice
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
interaction mode advanced
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
confirmation prompts on
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
327
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then any of the following:
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation on
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
phone confirmation off
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
328
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice and when prompted
say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
329
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
1
dial [[a] number]
2
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)
2
(hold call [on] | place call on hold)
2
join (calls | call)
2
mute call [on]
2
(mute call off | un-mute call)
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
330
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
3
[text] (messages | message)
help
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".
1
See Dial table below.
2
These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3
See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
700 (seven hundred)
800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
To access text messages say:
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
Then say any of the following:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
forward (text | [text] message)
reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
Menu Item
Hear it
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands
Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
331
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).
(connect |
device) ___
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Voice Command
call [[a] name]
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:
dial [[a]
number]
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Voice Command
This initiates the call.(dial | send)
This erases the spoken
digits.
(delete |
correct)
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
Receiving Calls
Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:
Menu Item
Accept
Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
332
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu Item
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Dial a number
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call History
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
333
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionDisplay
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Speed Dial
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
BT Devices
View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Description and
action
Voice command
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
334
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Ignore
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
View
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
More...
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
Forward
msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
More...
335
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Set as master
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
Set ringtone
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook pref.
336
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
Auto-download
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
Sorting Pref.
Last/First nameFirst/Last name
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
Select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
Pair additional phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
337
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu Item
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Master
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
338
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Set defaults
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Master reset
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
Install on SYNC
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
System info
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 326).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
339
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services
*
: Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report
*
: Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
*
This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 36). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 221).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
340
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Off with reminder:
Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
Off without reminder:
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
341
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
342
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.
To use voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health (Report)
To use the screen, press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Vehicle Health
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button and select on or off.Auto On?
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.
*
Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desired option and press the OK button.
Report Interval
343
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Run Report
Exit the current menu.Return
*
You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 328).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.
344
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Services
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
345
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC Apps
Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or direc-
tions.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destina-
tion.
Business search
You can also say the following:
To find the closest business or type of business to your loca-
tion, within business search.
Search near me
If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
Operator
346
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.
Yes
*
*
During an active route.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.
Goodbye
SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip and say
your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
347
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC Services quick tips
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.
348
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To view USB content select:
Description and ActionMessage
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Browse USB
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Message
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Description and ActionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Description and ActionCommand
Pauses device playback.pause
Resumes device playback.play
play [album] ___
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play all
349
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionCommand
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
Repeats the current track.repeat (one | track) [on]
Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
• Play song "Penny Lane".
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
the MEDIA button and select:
350
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Menu Item
BT audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
Press the MEDIA button and select either
USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This will enter the media menu.Options
Then any of the following:
Description and ActionMessage
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
Similar music
351
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionMessage
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
Browse USB
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Description and ActionDisplay
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.
*
Play all
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).
*
Playlists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*
Songs
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
352
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionDisplay
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
*
Artists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by album.
*
Albums
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
*
Genres
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
353
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.
To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice command
USB 1
USB 2
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 328).
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
*
tune [to] SAT
354
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
*
Sirius
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
help
*
If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
*
FM ___ HD ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
*
HD ___
[tune [to]] preset ___
Tune
help
*
If equipped.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)
E142599
To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:
Voice Commands
Sirius
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.
Voice Commands
tune [to] SAT
[tune [to]] SAT 1
[tune [to]] SAT 2
[tune [to]] SAT 3
355
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
You can say the
channel number (0-
233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
You can then say any of the following
commands.
pause
play
Voice Command
[play] next track
[play] previous track
[play | change to] track [number] ___
repeat (track | song) [on]
repeat folder [on]
repeat off
(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
356
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
357
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
358
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
359
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
360
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
361
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
362
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
363
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
364
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
365
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 414).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside
Temperature
D
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.
366
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
E223130
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.
Driver Temper-
ature
A
When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.
Heated steering
wheel
B
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
Passenger
Temperature
C
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
367
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.RoamingI
This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
911 Assist OffK
The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an
active Bluetooth alert.
Bluetooth AlertL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
Phone
368
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or
electric this is also where your settings and
power information is located.
You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 379).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).
369
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
E208626
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Audio
Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Naviga-
tion
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *Phone
370
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
InformationOption
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll callsQuick
dial
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 65).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
371
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
• Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 313).
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
• Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 112).
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNINGS
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
372
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 414).
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
373
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
374
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Demo navigation route.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
375
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please reference the website for any
further actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 414). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 426).
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
376
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time.
Software downloads can take place for up
to 30 minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 414). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company do not access the system data
for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company.
377
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HOME SCREEN
E205446
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current
route in real time.
Navigation *C
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
378
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Home screen displayTileItem
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
379
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
*Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “88.7 FM HD 1”.
*FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
* This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
380
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F
(15°C)-86.0°F (30°C).
Climate Set Temperature ___
Climate Help
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 414).
Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309” .Dial ___
381
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or an address.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality.Find an Address
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find POI
382
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find Intersection
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for
nearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".
Destination Nearest
___
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Destination Previous
Destination
Allows you to route to your home address.Destination Home
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find New Apps
383
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On
384
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
385
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
386
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu item
AM
FM
*SIRIUS
*CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and descrip-
tion
Menu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.
387
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for Sirius:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
388
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 414).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SIRIUS. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 414).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
389
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to resolve subscription
issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the chan-
nels available for your vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 414).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
390
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
391
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
392
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
*
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
*
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
393
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
394
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
FunctionButton
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 412).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
395
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 414).
E205823
Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.A
Heated steering wheel:B
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about
5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in temperatures as low as -4°F.
The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates
independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.
396
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the
vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may
also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your
vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the
wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the
windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the
driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to
defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister
vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 120).
AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch
the off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.
F
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically
turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature.
Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.G
Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that
circulates in your vehicle.
H
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX
A/C.
Rear: A pop up appears on the screen to display the rear control options.I
Touch the power icon to switch the rear climate control functions off and on.
Touch Rear Climate to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate
settings. Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the
settings. Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen
to adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
397
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To adjust fan speed, touch + or – next to the fan icon.
Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate control
functions does not affect their current settings.
Manual airflow distribution controls:J
Footwell and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,
demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and provides outside air
to reduce window fogging.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents.
Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.K
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and
passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When
recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down
the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the
interior.
Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging.
It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
398
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’ s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’ s manual
or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
399
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Websites
owner.ford.com
Websites
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E205447
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call
List
A
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
400
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
ContactsB
Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
Phone
Settings
C
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Phone (page 399).
Displays all recent text messages.Text
Messages
D
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone
Keypad
E
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a
call.
Call
Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
New text message notifications are not displayed on the screen
and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not
Disturb
F
Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 379). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
401
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
• 911 Assist (United States and Canada
Only). See Phone (page 399).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
402
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Mute
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 323).
403
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
2. Select Apple CarPlay on the
touchscreen.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 323).
Note: Android Auto may default to off, so
you may need to enable it from the Settings
screen.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
404
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
414).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
405
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionMenu Item
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
One to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
These locations cannot be deleted individually. To delete them,
preform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 426).
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Home
406
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionMenu Item
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
bar.
Add a
Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Search
Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
configuration):
Point of Interest
(POI) Categories
Food
Fuel
hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
407
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
DescriptionMenu Item
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Start
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
Cancel
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
408
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Highway
Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 414).Navigation
Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
Cancel Route
409
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Button
Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Press
the button again to un-mute guidance.
Mute Guidance
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
GoTo return to
your route
press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order
for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
410
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1110
cities (1049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 412).
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
411
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once
an app is running through AppLink, you can
control main features of the app through
voice commands and steering wheel
controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Websites
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
Applink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
412
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Connect Mobile
Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 414).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
413
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’ s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
414
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.
Speed Adaptive
Volume
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
415
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Reset Media
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-
base Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.
Device Informa-
tion
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
ActionMenu Item
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
Bluetooth
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.
416
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’ s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’ s manual
or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
417
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.
Add a Bluetooth
Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to see phone and device information.Device Informa-
tion
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Auto-Download
Contacts
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download
Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
418
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ring-
tone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in
Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.
Roaming
Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Low Battery
Notification
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
you can adjust the following option:
419
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Set Emergency
Contacts
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
3D City Model
420
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.
Incident Map
Icons
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
Always Use ___
Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.
Automatically
Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Dynamic Route
Guidance
421
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Freeways
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll
Roads
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
a navigation route.
Avoid
Ferries/Car
Trains
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance
Prompts
Then select any of the following:
A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.Voice and Tones
Only voice instructions are given.Voice Only
Only a tone sounds to prompt you.Tones Only
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
422
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
Update Mobile
Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive
an update.
No update is
required.
The system has
detected a new app
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.
423
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
Automatic System Updates
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi
You can adjust the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.View Available
Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Wi-Fi Available
Notifications
424
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Auto
425
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Night
The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Off
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts
and confirmations.
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
426
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
visit the Ford website.
Website
owner.ford.com
Website
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.
There is back-
ground noise
during a phone
call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person
but they cannot
hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to
be restarted.
During a call, I
cannot hear the
other person
and they cannot
hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to down-
load my phone-
book.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
427
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system
says "Phone-
book down-
loaded" but my
SYNC 3 phone-
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named SYNC enter the next
menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
428
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
This is a cell phone limita-
tion.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunc-
tion.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
429
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold
temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
my device when
I start my
vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio
does not
stream.
The device is not
connected.
Make sure that all song details are popu-
lated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
music that is on
my device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 386).
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.
Perform a master reset. See Settings
(page 414).
The device needs to be
re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
not hear any
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
430
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi
signal.
Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your
SSID, don’t use the default
name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as
part of the MAC address.
Multiple Access points
within range with the same
SSID.
Position the vehicle close to
the hotspot with the front of
the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and
remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and
cordless phones may cause
interference.
Weak signal probably due
to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or high
interference.
Disconnecting after
successful connection.
If the vehicle is equipped
with heated windshield, try
positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not
facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting
There may be an obstruction
between SYNC 3 and the
hotspot.
Poor signal seen by SYNC 3
despite being near a
hotspot.
but not on the windshield,
position the vehicle to face
the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the
windows in the direction of
the hotspot if that is feas-
ible.
Try to remove other
obstructions that may
impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
Please set the network to
visible and try again.
The hotspot was defined as
a hidden network.
A hotspot is not listed in the
list of available networks.
431
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not
provide a hotspot
SYNC 3 does not currently
provide a hotspot.
SYNC 3 is not seen when
searching for Wi-Fi networks
from your phone or other
devices.
Check the signal quality
(under network details), if
SYNC 3 indicates good or
excellent, test with another
high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environ-
ment is more predictable.
Poor signal strength, too far
from the hotspot, hotspot is
supporting multiple
connections, slow Internet
connection or other prob-
lems.
Software download takes
too long.
Test the connection with
another device, if the
hotspot requires a subscrip-
tion, you may contact the
service provider.
It is possible that there is no
new software. The
connected hotspot may be
a managed one and it
requires either a subscrip-
tion or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
SYNC 3 seems to connect
with a hotspot and the
signal strength is excellent
but the software is not being
updated.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a
compatible smartphone; an
Android with OS 2.3 or
higher or an iPhone 3GS or
newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, make sure you
You did not connect an
Applink Compatible phone
to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC 3 does
not find any applications.
pair and connect your phone
432
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
to SYNC 3 in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB
cable.
Make sure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Make sure the app is running
on your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login to the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC 3 find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometimes apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC 3,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, then select it and
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
select the phone's settings
menu and select 'Apps',
then find the particular app
and choose 'Force stop.' Do
not forget to restart the app
afterward, then select "Find
New Apps" on SYNC 3.
433
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC 3's
Mobile App's Menu.
Switch Bluetooth off and
then on to reset it on your
phone. If you are in your
vehicle, SYNC 3 should be
able to automatically re-
connect to your phone if you
press the "Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions of
the Android operating
system that may cause apps
that were found on your
previous vehicle drive to not
be found again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
434
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
You may need to reset the
USB connection to SYNC 3.
My iPhone is connected, my
app is running, I restarted
the app but I still cannot find
it on SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC 3, but there is
no sound or the sound is
very low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
3 to find. If the app has a
"Ford SYNC" setting, disable
that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that apps
can use to connect. If you
have more AppLink apps on
your phone than the number
of available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps Menu.
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
what I am
saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
435
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
the name of a
song or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.
Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The contact name may
contain special charac-
ters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
436
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
the pronunci-
ation of some
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
437
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and inform-
ation and entertainment
display.
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting please call or visit the Ford
Website.
Ford Support
United States: 1-800-392-3673Customer Relation-
ship Center
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
owner.ford.comWebsite
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
438
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Custom Accessories are available for
your vehicle through an authorized dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Keyless entry.
• Side window deflectors.
• Sill plates.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system*.
• Seat covers.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Interior light kit.
• In-vehicle safe*.
• Roof rack and carriers*.
• SUV camping tent*.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Back-up alarm.
• Bumper protector.
• Car cover*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo security shade.
• Hood deflector.
• Locking fuel plug.
• Park assist sensors.
• Remote start.
• Roadside assistance kit*.
• Vehicle security system.
• Wheel locks.
439
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Accessories
*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
440
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect means peace of mind. It’ s the
extended service plan backed by Ford
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage. When you visit your
Ford Dealer, Insist on genuine Ford Protect
extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
Extended Service Plan. With Ford Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect plan coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new
owner. Which should give you and your
potential buyer a little more peace of mind.
441
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect also offers a Premium
Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about the cost of
your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Extended
Service Plan has to offer while paying over
time. You are pre-approved with no credit
check or hassles. To learn more, call our
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
442
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 304).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
443
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 246).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
444
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
445
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
446
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your
dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
447
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.
Other maintenance items
1
Replace engine air filter.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
448
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance, as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message
appearing in the information display
prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints (if equipped with grease
fittings).
Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
449
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive vehicles).
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule.
450
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance
Axle(s) and transfer case (four-wheel drive
vehicles) fluid changes or level checks are
not required unless a leak is suspected or
the assembly has been submerged in
water. During long periods of trailer towing
with outside temperatures above 70°F
(21°C) or at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), change
the rear axle fluid every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) or three months, whichever
comes first, if the rear axle is filled with
non-synthetic fluid. This interval can be
waived and the 150,000 mi (240,000km)
service interval can continue if the rear axle
is filled with 75W85 synthetic gear fluid
meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C942-A, part number
XY-75W85-QL, or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or
equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1,800 mi (2,900 km).
Engine Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter is dependent
on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter.
451
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
452
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
453
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
454
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
455
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
456
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
457
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
458
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
459
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
460
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
461
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
462
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
463
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
464
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
465
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
466
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
467
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
468
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’ s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
469
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
470
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
471
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
472
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
473
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
474
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
475
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
476
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
477
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
478
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
479
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
480
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’ s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
481
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
482
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
483
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
484
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
485
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
486
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Appendices
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................165
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................112
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................173
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................173
Accessories....................................................439
Exterior Style.......................................................439
Interior Style........................................................439
Lifestyle.................................................................439
Peace of Mind.....................................................439
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
Adjusting the Headlamps........................256
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................257
Vertical Aim Adjustment................................256
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................70
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Column Shift/Manual Adjustable
Steering Column..........................................65
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Floor Shift/Manual Adjustable
Steering Column..........................................65
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................66
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................67
End of Travel Position.........................................67
Memory Feature....................................................67
Airbag Disposal................................................41
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................112
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............262
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................62
Ambient Lighting............................................78
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................62
Arming the Alarm.................................................62
Disarming the Alarm...........................................62
Appendices....................................................462
Apps...................................................................412
...................................................................................412
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................413
Audible Warnings and Indicators............90
Direction Indicator Chime.................................90
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................90
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................90
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................90
Audio Control...................................................67
Media........................................................................68
Seek, Next or Previous.......................................68
Type One..................................................................67
Type Two.................................................................68
Audio System.................................................313
General Information..........................................313
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................314
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD............................................................316
Rear Seat Audio Controls................................318
Autolamps.........................................................74
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps.........................................................74
Automatic Climate Control........................115
Automatic Transmission...........................159
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................162
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................164
SelectShift™ Automatic
Transmission....................................................161
Understanding the Shift Positions of your
Automatic Transmission.............................159
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check..............................................................251
Autowipers.........................................................71
Auxiliary Power Points.................................141
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................141
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................141
Locations................................................................141
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................253
487
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Blind Spot Information System..............189
False Alerts...........................................................192
Switching the System Off and On...............193
System Errors.......................................................192
System Limitations............................................192
Using the System...............................................189
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
Booster Seats..................................................24
Types of Booster Seats......................................25
Brake Fluid Check........................................252
Brakes................................................................173
General Information...........................................173
Breaking-In......................................................218
Bulb Specification Chart..........................260
C
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications...............308
Specifications.....................................................309
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................265
Center Console..............................................143
Changing a Bulb...........................................257
Central High-mounted Brake Lamp
Bulb...................................................................260
Fog Lamp Bulb...................................................259
Front Direction Indicator Bulb.......................258
Headlamp Bulb..................................................258
LED Central High-mounted Brake Lamp
Bulb...................................................................260
LED Direction Indicator and Side Marker
Bulbs..................................................................259
LED Headlamp Bulb.........................................258
LED Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp
Bulbs.................................................................260
License Plate Lamp Bulb...............................260
Rear Lamp, Brake Lamp, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reverse Lamp
Bulbs..................................................................259
Side Direction Indicator Bulb........................260
Side Marker Bulb...............................................258
Changing a Fuse............................................241
Fuses.......................................................................241
Changing a Road Wheel............................297
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................297
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools.........298
Tire Change Procedure....................................299
Changing the 12V Battery.........................253
Battery Management System.......................254
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................262
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................255
Checking MyKey System Status..............50
Checking the Wiper Blades......................255
Childminder Mirror..........................................81
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................35
Child Restraint Positioning.........................26
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information.............................................16
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................268
With King Ranch Edition.................................269
Without King Ranch Edition..........................268
Cleaning Products.......................................264
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................270
Cleaning the Engine...................................266
Cleaning the Exterior..................................265
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................265
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................265
Stripes or Graphics............................................265
Underbody...........................................................266
Under Hood.........................................................266
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................268
Cleaning the Interior....................................267
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................267
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................49
Climate............................................................396
Climate Control..............................................112
Climate Controlled Seats..........................134
Cooled Seats........................................................134
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................247
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......40
Creating a MyKey...........................................48
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................48
Cruise Control.................................................69
Principle of Operation.......................................187
488
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................187
Customer Assistance.................................226
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................75
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)........................................75
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................75
Digital Radio...................................................318
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting.............................................319
Direction Indicators........................................76
Lane Change..........................................................76
Doors and Locks.............................................52
Drive Control..................................................194
Driver Select Suspension................................194
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................37
Children and Airbags..........................................38
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................38
Driving Aids.....................................................189
Driving Hints...................................................218
Driving Through Water................................219
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................75
E
Economical Driving......................................218
Emission Control System..........................156
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................157
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................157
End User License Agreement.................462
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................462
Engine Block Heater....................................148
Using the Engine Block Heater......................149
Engine Coolant Check................................247
Adding Coolant...................................................247
Coolant Change.................................................249
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................250
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................249
Recycled Coolant..............................................248
Severe Climates.................................................249
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................61
Engine Oil Check..........................................245
Adding Engine Oil..............................................245
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................245
Engine Specifications................................304
Drivebelt Routing...............................................304
Entertainment..............................................386
AM/FM Radio......................................................387
Apps.......................................................................395
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................394
CD (If equipped)................................................393
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................390
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................388
Sources.................................................................386
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................395
USB Ports.............................................................395
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks..........................207
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................213
Hitches...................................................................207
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................214
Safety Chains......................................................209
Trailer Brakes........................................................210
Trailer Lamps........................................................213
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector)......................................................207
When Towing a Trailer.......................................213
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Exterior Mirrors...............................................80
Auto-Dimming Feature.......................................81
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................81
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors..............................80
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................81
Memory Mirrors......................................................81
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................80
Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................80
Signal Indicator Mirrors.......................................81
489
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................30
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................31
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy...............30
Floor Mats........................................................219
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................76
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................70
Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11
Ford Protect....................................................441
Ford Protect (CANADA ONLY).....................442
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)...................................................................441
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................165
Front Fog Lamps............................................76
Front Parking Aid..........................................183
Fuel and Refueling.......................................150
Fuel Consumption........................................155
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................155
Filling the Fuel Tank...........................................155
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................151
Fuel Filter........................................................253
Fuel Quality......................................................151
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................151
Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Fuses.................................................................233
Fuse Specification Chart...........................233
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........237
Power Distribution Box....................................233
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........136
Gauges...............................................................84
Type 1 and 2............................................................84
Type 3.......................................................................86
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................42
Intelligent Access.................................................42
General Maintenance Information.......443
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................445
Owner Checks and Services.........................444
Protecting Your Investment...........................443
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................443
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................443
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................229
Getting the Services You Need...............226
Away From Home..............................................226
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................174
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................222
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control....................180
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................256
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................257
Head Restraints..............................................121
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................122
Heated Seats..................................................133
Front Seats............................................................133
Rear Seats.............................................................133
Heated Steering Wheel...............................69
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................120
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................120
Heated Rear Window........................................120
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................112
Hill Start Assist..............................................174
Switching the System On and Off................175
Using Hill Start Assist........................................175
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................116
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................118
General Hints........................................................116
Heating the Interior Quickly..............................117
Recommended Settings for Cooling............118
Recommended Settings for Heating............117
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather..............................................................118
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................173
Home Screen.................................................378
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
490
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
I
Ignition Switch...............................................144
In California (U.S. Only).............................227
Information Display Control......................69
Information Displays......................................91
General Information.............................................91
Information Messages................................102
4WD Messages......................................................111
AdvanceTrac™ / Traction Control
Messages..........................................................103
Alarm Messages.................................................103
Battery and Charging System
Messages..........................................................103
Blind Spot Information System
Messages..........................................................104
Brake System Messages..................................104
Door Messages....................................................104
Engine Messages................................................105
Fuel Messages.....................................................105
Keys and Intelligent Access
Messages..........................................................105
Maintenance Messages...................................106
MyKey™ Messages............................................107
Off Road Messages............................................107
Park Aid Messages.............................................108
Power Steering Messages..............................108
Remote Start Messages..................................109
Suspension System Messages.....................109
Tire Messages......................................................109
Trailer Messages.................................................109
Transmission Messages....................................110
Installing Child Restraints.............................17
Child Seats...............................................................17
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats.....................................................................21
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts .........................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)...........................................20
Using Tether Straps..............................................21
Instrument Cluster........................................84
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................75
Interior Lamps..................................................77
Front Row Map and Dome Lamps.................77
Front Row Map Lamps........................................77
Rear Cargo Lamp..................................................78
Second Row Map Lamps...................................77
Interior Mirror....................................................81
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................81
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................223
Jump Starting......................................................224
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................223
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................224
K
Keyless Entry...................................................58
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..............................................................58
Unlocking and Locking the Doors..................60
Keyless Starting............................................144
Ignition Modes.....................................................145
Keys and Remote Controls.........................42
Principle of Operation.........................................42
L
Lighting Control...............................................73
Headlamp Flasher................................................74
High Beams.............................................................73
Lighting...............................................................73
General Information............................................73
Limited Slip Differential..............................172
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers..............197
Load Carrying.................................................196
Load Limit.......................................................198
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................202
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................198
Locking and Unlocking.................................52
Activating Intelligent Access............................52
Autolock...................................................................53
Auto Relock............................................................53
Autounlock.............................................................54
Battery Saver.........................................................54
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock........................................................54
491
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Illuminated Entry..................................................54
Illuminated Exit.....................................................54
Power Door Locks................................................52
Remote Control.....................................................52
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................53
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................53
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................297
M
Maintenance..................................................243
General Information.........................................243
Manual Climate Control..............................112
Manual Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Manual Temperature
Control (EMTC)...........................................113
Manual Liftgate...............................................54
Closing the Liftgate.............................................56
Opening the Liftgate...........................................55
Opening the Liftgate Window.........................55
Manual Seats.................................................123
Manual Lumbar ..................................................124
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward..............................................................123
Recline Adjustment............................................123
Media Hub......................................................323
Memory Function..........................................125
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................126
Saving a PreSet Position..................................125
Message Center
See: Information Displays..................................91
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..............120
See: Windows and Mirrors................................79
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof...........................................................82
Bounce-Back.........................................................83
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............83
Venting the Moonroof........................................83
Motorcraft Parts..........................................304
MyKey Troubleshooting................................51
MyKey™.............................................................47
Principle of Operation.........................................47
N
Navigation.....................................................404
cityseeker................................................................411
Destination Mode.............................................405
Map Mode............................................................404
Navigation Map Updates..................................411
Navigation Menu...............................................409
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.....................411
Waypoints.............................................................410
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........446
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor............................446
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................447
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................246
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................245
Opening and Closing the Hood..............243
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................230
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........231
Overhead Console........................................143
P
Parking Aids....................................................182
Principle of Operation.......................................182
Parking Brake..................................................174
Passive Anti-Theft System..........................61
SecuriLock®............................................................61
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................61
Pedals.................................................................70
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Phone..............................................................399
During a Phone Call..........................................402
Making Calls.........................................................401
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................399
Phone Menu.......................................................400
Receiving Calls...................................................402
Smartphone Connectivity.............................403
Text Messaging..................................................403
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................52
492
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Power Liftgate.................................................56
Obstacle Detection.............................................58
Opening and Closing the Liftgate...................57
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................58
Power Running Boards................................63
Power Seats....................................................124
Power Lumbar......................................................125
Power Recline......................................................124
Power Windows..............................................79
Accessory Delay....................................................79
Bounce-Back.........................................................79
One-Touch Down.................................................79
One-Touch Up.......................................................79
Window Lock.........................................................79
Protecting the Environment........................15
R
Rear Axle...........................................................172
Rear Parking Aid............................................182
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................183
Rear Passenger Climate Controls...........119
Rear Quarter Windows................................82
Rear Seats.......................................................126
Adjusting the Second Row Center 20%
Seat......................................................................131
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seat for E-Z Entry..........................................128
Exiting the Third Row........................................129
Folding Down the Second Row 40% Seat
..............................................................................126
Folding Down the Third Row Seats to the
Load Floor..........................................................131
Folding the Second Row Center 20% Seat
..............................................................................130
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seats in Cargo Mode.....................................127
PowerFold™ Third Row Seat.........................132
Reclining the Second Row Outboard 40%
Seatback...........................................................129
Returning to the Upright Position from the
Full Lowered Load Floor Position............128
Third Row Seats...................................................131
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................196
Cargo Management System..........................196
Cargo Shelf and Divider...................................196
Third Row Storage Bin......................................197
Rear View Camera.......................................184
Using the Rear View Camera System.........184
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................184
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........72
Rear Window Washer..........................................72
Rear Window Wiper.............................................72
Recommended Towing Weights...........204
Reduced Engine Performance.................218
Refueling..........................................................152
System Warnings................................................154
Remote Control..............................................43
Car Finder................................................................45
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................43
Intelligent Access Key.........................................43
Memory Feature...................................................46
Remote Start.........................................................45
Replacing the Battery.........................................44
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................45
Remote Start.................................................120
Automatic Settings............................................120
Removing a Headlamp..............................257
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............270
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................46
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................231
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................231
Roadside Assistance...................................221
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................221
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................222
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Roadside Emergencies...............................221
493
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................197
Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................197
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................218
Running Out of Fuel......................................151
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................152
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................152
S
Safety Canopy™............................................39
Safety Precautions......................................150
Satellite Radio..............................................320
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)..................................................................321
Satellite Radio Reception Factors................321
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service...................321
Troubleshooting.................................................322
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........452
Scheduled Maintenance..........................443
Seatbelt Extension........................................35
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................32
Second Row Comfort Guide............................32
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................33
Belt-Minder™........................................................33
Seatbelts...........................................................29
Principle of Operation........................................29
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...............................................................33
Conditions of operation.....................................33
Seats...................................................................121
Security...............................................................61
Self-Leveling Suspension.........................194
Settings............................................................414
911 Assist................................................................419
Ambient Lighting...............................................425
Bluetooth...............................................................416
Clock.......................................................................416
Display...................................................................425
General..................................................................423
Media Player.........................................................415
Mobile Apps.........................................................422
Navigation............................................................420
Phone......................................................................417
Radio......................................................................420
Sound......................................................................414
Valet Mode...........................................................426
Vehicle...................................................................425
Voice Control.......................................................426
Wi-Fi.......................................................................424
Side Airbags.....................................................38
Sitting in the Correct Position...................121
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................291
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................449
Exceptions...........................................................450
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................187
Stability Control.............................................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................144
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................145
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................147
Failure to Start......................................................147
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...............148
Important Ventilating Information..............148
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................148
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................147
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................146
Vehicles with Keyless Start............................146
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........144
General Information..........................................144
Steering............................................................193
Electric Power Steering....................................193
Steering Wheel Lock...................................145
Steering Wheel...............................................65
Storage Compartments.............................143
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................82
Sun Visors.........................................................82
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................82
Supplementary Restraints System.........36
Principle of Operation........................................36
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................365
General Information.........................................365
494
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................426
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................340
911 Assist..............................................................340
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)...................................................344
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United
States Only)....................................................342
SYNC™............................................................324
General Information.........................................324
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................356
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate...........................................54
See: Power Liftgate.............................................56
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............304
Terrain Response.........................................180
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................228
Tire Care..........................................................276
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................277
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................276
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................278
Temperature A B C.............................................277
Traction AA A B C...............................................276
Treadwear.............................................................276
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........292
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................293
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................293
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................273
Towing a Trailer............................................203
Load Placement................................................203
Towing Points.................................................214
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................215
Emergency Towing.............................................215
Four-wheel-down Towing...............................216
Recreational Towing..........................................215
Towing.............................................................203
Traction Control.............................................176
Principle of Operation.......................................176
Trailer Sway Control...................................204
Transfer Case Fluid Check.........................251
Transmission Code Designation............307
Transmission..................................................159
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................159
U
Under Hood Overview...............................244
Universal Garage Door Opener...............136
HomeLink Wireless Control System............136
USB Port..........................................................323
Using Cruise Control....................................187
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................188
Switching Cruise Control On and Off..........187
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................165
4WD Indicator Lights........................................165
4WD Switch Positions......................................165
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles..............................................................167
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles..............................................................167
Using Hill Descent Control.......................180
Principle of Operation......................................180
Using Hill Descent Control.............................180
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................51
Using Power Running Boards....................63
Automatic Power Deploy..................................63
Automatic Power Stow......................................63
Bounce-back.........................................................64
Enabling and Disabling......................................63
Manual Power Deploy........................................63
Using Snow Chains......................................291
Using Stability Control................................178
Stability Control and Traction Control with
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)..............178
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................348
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............352
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................354
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................348
Media Menu Features........................................351
495
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Media Voice Commands................................349
USB 2......................................................................354
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........354
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............328
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu..................................................................333
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................336
Bluetooth Devices..............................................337
Making Calls.........................................................332
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............329
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................330
Phone Options during an Active Call.........332
Phone Voice Commands................................330
Receiving Calls....................................................332
System Settings.................................................338
Text Messaging...................................................334
Using Traction Control................................176
Switching the System Off ...............................176
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................176
Using Voice Recognition...........................326
Audio Voice Commands.................................380
Climate Voice Commands..............................381
Initiating a Voice Session................................326
Mobile App Voice Commands......................383
Navigation Voice Commands.......................382
Phone Voice Commands.................................381
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................384
System Interaction and Feedback...............327
Voice Settings Commands............................384
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................229
V
Vehicle Care...................................................264
General Information.........................................264
Vehicle Certification Label.......................307
Vehicle Identification Number...............306
Vehicle Storage.............................................270
Battery.....................................................................271
Body........................................................................270
Brakes......................................................................271
Cooling system.....................................................271
Engine......................................................................271
Fuel system...........................................................271
General..................................................................270
Miscellaneous.......................................................271
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................271
Tires..........................................................................271
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................112
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........306
Voice Control...................................................68
Type One.................................................................68
Type Two.................................................................69
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................87
4X2............................................................................89
4X4 Auto.................................................................89
4X4 HIGH................................................................90
4X4 LOW................................................................90
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................87
Battery......................................................................87
Brake System.........................................................87
Cruise Control........................................................87
Direction Indicator................................................87
Door Ajar..................................................................87
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................87
Engine Oil................................................................88
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................88
Front Airbag...........................................................88
Front Fog Lamps..................................................88
High Beam..............................................................88
Hill Descent............................................................88
Liftgate Ajar............................................................88
Low Fuel Level......................................................88
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................88
Low Washer Fluid................................................88
Parking Lamps......................................................88
Powertrain Fault...................................................88
Service Engine Soon...........................................89
Stability Control System...................................89
Stability Control System Off...........................89
Transmission Tow/Haul....................................89
Washer Fluid Check....................................252
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................265
See: Wipers and Washers...................................71
Waxing.............................................................266
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................297
496
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
Wheels and Tires..........................................273
General Information..........................................273
Technical Specifications.................................302
Windows and Mirrors....................................79
Windshield Washers......................................72
Windshield Wipers..........................................71
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................71
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................255
Wipers and Washers......................................71
497
Expedition (TB7) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 03/2016, First Printing
Index
